aBng-qa^^
chools aid Social Wonhip.
k^^By ISAIAH BALTZELL.^^
DAYTON, OHIO.
United Brethren Publishing House.
1886.
^ as^SiBBgi^asTasaB^^aB^s^Eia^agpB
FROM THE LIBRARY OF
REV. LOUIS FITZGERALD BENSON, D. D
BEQUEATHED BY HIM TO
THE LIBRARY OF
PRINCETON THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY
m
Section
^A OF Pfl//|j^
GOLDEN BONG-Br 2 '*
FOR THE
abbaf ft- jp drool, jpandttarg, anil j&ottal ffiorshtjr,
BY
Rev. I. BALTZELL.
Author of " Choral Gems" " Camp-Meeting Singer" etc.
INCLUDING AN
ELEMENTARY AND PRACTICAL DEPARTMENT
OF THE
THEORY OF MUSIC,
By J. H. KURZENKNABE.
Containing an easy system of teaching the Elements of Music, simplifying its notation, and bringing within tlie
comprehension of all who desire a knowledge of this science, — the art of reading music at sight.
DAYTON, O.:
"W. J". SHUEY.
1884.
PREFACE.
->^s*S»»-
In the preparation of these " Golden Songs/' the author has constantly aimed to have
each song illustrate or enforce some great Bible truth. Every piece of music found in this
book can and will be sung in every Sunday-school where it is introduced. Not a single song
has been put in merely to " fill up," but with the idea of adaptation and merit. This is our
apology for the title, " Golden Songs."
An entirely new feature is introduced, which we believe will meet a want long felt among
Sunday-school workers, i. e., a complete and thorough course of Elements of Vocal Music,
prepared by Prof. Kurzenknabe, one of the most successful teachers of the art of Reading
Music at sight. These rudimental pages will appear shortly in a new Sunday-school singing
book, to be called the " Reward," by the author of these elements.
The blessing of God, the Father, has been constantly sought during the progress of this
book ; and it is now sent out as a candidate for the favor of the lovers of sacred song, with the
earnest prayer that, under God, it may prove a real blessing to all who may sing its " Golden
Songs" " with the spirit and the understanding also."
Our sincere thanks are due the numerous contributors to these pages, as well as to those
authors who have kindly permitted the use of popular Sunday-school songs.
IIarrisburg, Pa., March, 1874. I. BALTZELL.
, • -■ — ■ ------ ■ — n .!_■■_. . ' - j m\ i
Entered, according to Act cf Congress, in the year 1874, by W. J. SHUEY, in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
A simplified system of Musical Notation, being a Guide to the Art of Reading Music at Sight,
LESSON I.
Introduction. — A musical sound is called a Tone.
Distinctions. — On examination, it will be perceived
that there are certain distinctions.
A tone may be Long or Short,
It may be High or Low.
It may be Soft or Loud.
Property. — If this be so, then a tone must have
three conditions of existence, or three properties be-
longing to it.
The one being Length.
Another Pitch.
A third Force or Power.
No tone can exist without Length, nor without
Pitch, nor without Power.
Departments. — These three properties, Length, Pitch
and Power, lead us to three grand divisions, or de-
partments in the Science of Music.
The one treating of Length, Rhythmics.
" " " " Pitch, Melodies.
" " " " Power, Dynamics.
Rhythmics.— From the Greek, signifying "to flow," measured
movement.
Melodies. — From the same, meaning "a song, or poem,'" —
a tune.
Dynamics.— From the same, signifying H to be able," Power,
Expression,
Teacher and PupiL
Q. What is a musical sound called ?
A. A tone.
Q. What distinctions are perceived on examination
of a tone?
A. It may be Long or Short.
" " " High or Low.
" " " Soft or Loud.
Q. What essential properties belong to every tone ?
A. Length, Pitch, Force or Power.
Q. Can a tone exist without Length?
A. No.
Q. Can it exist without Pitch ?
A. No. _
Q. Can it exist without Power ?
A. No.
Q. How many departments have we in Music?
A. Three.
Q. What are they ?
A. Rhythmics, Melodies, Dynamics.
Q. Which department treats of Length?
A. Rhythmics.
Q. Which department treats of Pitch ?
A. Melodies.
Q. Which of Force or Power ?
A. Dynamics.
Q. From what language are the names of these de-
partments taken ?
A. From the Greek. 3
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
lesson n.
Rhythmics.
Bars and Measures. — Certain perpendicular lines
J | are called Bars, and the space
between the same is called Measure.
Any two bars are called Double Bars.
Bars show us the boundary of a measure.
Double Bars are used at the close of an exercise.
Time. — Measures, and parts of the same, may be
indicated, — to the ear, by counting, — to the eye, by
certain movements of the hand, called Beats. (Beat-
ing time.)
Double Measure. — A measure having two beats,
the one a downward, and the other an upward one, is
called Double Measure, — a slight stress of voice,
called Accent, falls on the downward beat.
(Beating time is usually done with the right hand.)
Triple Measure, — Has three beats; Down, Left,
Up.
The accent falls on the down beat.
Quadruple Measure.— Has four beats; Down, Left,
Bight, Up.
The main accent belongs to the first, and a slight
accent to the third beat.
Sextuple Measure.— Has six beats, it is, however,
usually kept by only two, — Down, Up, calculating
three to each beat. Accent on first and fourth*
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. What are certain perpendicular lines in music
called? A. Bars.
Q. The space between them ?
A. Measures.
Q. What the two bars together ?
A. Double Bars.
Q. How are Measures or parts of the same indicated
to the eye ?
A. By certain movements of the hand, called Beat3.
Q. How many beats has Double Measure 2
A. Two.
Q. How are they made ?
A. Down, Up.
Q. Which beat must receive the accent?
A. The down beat.
Q. How many beats in Triple Measure.
A. Three.
Q. How are they made ?
A. Down, Left, Up.
Q. Where does the accent belong ?
A. To the down beat.
Q. How many beats in Quadruple Measure?
A. Four.
Q. How are they made ?
A* Down, Left, Right, Up.
Q. Where do the accents belong?
A. The main accent on the first, as light one on the
third.
Q. How many beats are usually given to Sextuple
Measure ?
A. Two; Down, Up.
Q. Where does the accent belong ?
A. To both beats.
ELEMENTARY DEPABTMENT.
lesson in.
RHYTHMICS.
Notes. — Characters, indicating a certain length,
that a tone should be held (or sounded), are called
Notes.
Notes, then, represent the length of certain tones. •
You could not tell by a note alone, how high or
low, nor how soft or loud, to sound the same ; we can
only tell how long a certain tone should be sounded.
Notes having a closed head and stem J J
are called Quarter Notes.
They are usually given the time or duration of
distinct counting, or to the beating of the pulse of a
healthy person.
Notes with an open head and stem
are called Half Nofrs.
They are in value double the length of Quarter
notes.
Notes with simply an open head & <y & &
are called Whole Notes. They represent double the
length of Half notes, or are four times as long as
Quarters.
Notes having one hook f T £ f are called
Eighth Notes. They represent one-half the value of
Quarters.
Notes being distinguished by two hooks, ^ $ $ $
are called Sixteenth Notes.
They represent one-half the value of Eighth notes;
it requires four of them to equal in time one Quarter.
■Teacher and Pupil.
Q. What are the Characters called which represent
the length of tones ?
A. Notes.
Q. Can we tell by a note alone how high or low to
sound a tone ?
A. No.
Q. Can we tell by it alone how soft or loud to sound?
A. No.
Q. What then does a note alone indicate?
A. Length.
Q. How can you tell a Quarter note?
A. By a closed head and stem.
Q. What is the time usually given to a Quarter note ?
A. The time of distinct counting.
Q. Does it make any difference if the stem is up
or downward ?
A. No.
Q. How can you tell a naif note ?
A. By an open head and stem.
Q. How many Quarter notes in value are re-
presented by a Half note?
A. A Half note is equal to two Quarters.
Q. How can you tell a Whole note ?
A. By an open head.
Q. How many Half notes are represented here?
A. Two.
Q. How many Quarters ?
A. Four.
Q. How do we know Eighth notes ?
A. They are distinguished by one hook.
Q. How many belong to the time of a Quarter?
A. Two.
Q. How can we tell Sixteenth notes?
A. By two hooks.
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
e
Notes with three hooka attached j j
are called Thirty-second Notes. / • P p
They are one-half the value of Sixteenths, one-
fourth of one Eighth note ; it requires the time of
eight of them to one Quarter note.
Sixty-fourth notes are not generally used in vocal
music, they have four hooks.
Any of the foregoing notes may be prolonged to
one-half of their value by adding a dot, . thus : J
equals ^ * p» J equals J J J*
A second dot adds one-half of the value of the first,
thus : equals J J J J\ or G . . equals
J • When the figure 3 occurs above
or
under any three notes 0 & 0 they are called Triplets,
these three notes represent the time of only two, or
are to be sounded to the same time it would require
for only two of those notes. They generally occur
to words like merrily, cheerily, etc.
LESSON IV.
RHYTHMICS.
Rests. — Characters representing a certain length of
Silence are called Rests.
The following Rests represent the same time or du-
ration of silence as the corresponding notes do of
tones.
Teacher and PupvL
Q. How Thirty-seconds ?
A. By three hooks.
Q. What is the use of a Dot, when it follows im-
mediately after a note ?
A. It adds one-half to its value.
, Q. How many Quarters equal a dotted Half note.
'A. Three.
Q. How many Eighths a dotted Quarter ?
A. Three.
Q. What is the use of a second dot.
A. It adds one-half to the value of the first dot.
Q. What are three notes together, with the figure
three above or below the same called ?
A. Triplets.
Q. How is the value of these notes as regarding
time affected ?
A. They represent the time of only two of the same
notes.
Q. To what words do Triplets usually occur ?
A. Merrily, cheerily, etc.
Sometimes Triplets may be represented by only two
notes, thus : 0 3# ; here we have, however, three eighths,
as well as in the example. The figure 3 effects the
value of the notes, making them triplets.
Q. What are the characters standing for silence
called?
A. Rests.
Q. How is the time of rests kept in comparison to
the corresponding notes?
A. It is the same.
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
A character under the line, -twm- -mm- called a Whole
Rest,
A character above the line, -»- -m- is called a Half
Best
Turned to the right, f fTT Quarter Best.
Turned to the left, 1111 Eighth Best.
Two hooks, 1 1 3 3 f Sixteenth Best.
Three hooks, 3 3 3 3 Thirty-second Best.
1111
A peculiar feature of the whole rest is, that it not
only represents the equal of two halts or four quar-
ters, but it also represents a whole measure rest, no
matter what kind of time is given.
By Rests, as well as by Notes, the time ought to be
kept prompt ; no sluggish movement can be allowed
in music ; give full value to every Note and Rest, but
no more.
LESSON T.
EHYTHMICS.
Varieties Of Measure.— Measures are indicated by
the use of figures in the form of fractions.
The upper figure represents the number of Beats,
or what kind of measures we have, the lower figure
represents the variety of measure, the kind of Notes,
or the equal of which is required to each Beat.
There is no difference to the ear, as regards variety
of measure, the difference is only seemingly so to the
eye.
■Teacher and Pupil.
Q, How can you tell a Whole rest?
A. It is under the line.
Q. How a Half rest?
A. It is above the line.
Q. How a Quarter ?
A. Turned to the right.
Q. How an Eighth?
A. Turned to the Left.
Q. How can we tell a Sixteenth rest?
A. It is known by two hooks.
Q. How a Thirty-second?
A. By three hooks.
Q. "What peculiar use do we have by a "Whole rest?
A. It represents also a Measure rest.
Q. Does it not make a difference what kind of time
or measure is given? A. No.
Q. Ought we to allow any sluggish movement by
either notes or rests? A. No.
Q. How should the movement be ?
A. Prompt?
Q. Must full value be given to Notes and Rests?
A. Yes.
Q. H-qw is Measure or Time indicated ?
A. By the use of figures.
Q. What form do these figures assume?
. 1 . The form of fractions.
Q. Which figure tells the kind of measure?
A. The upper.
Q. Which the variety?
A. The lower.
Q. Is there any difference as regards varieties of
measure ?
A. No. The difference is only seemingly so to the
eye, there is none to the ear.
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
Tabular view of varieties of measure.
2
2
2
4
2
"8
3
4
2
2
Bl
4
4
4
£
4
8
8
4
8
9.
8
Suppose a certain Tune should be written in -4-
time, and then again in -#-, the first will not be sung
slower than the latter would be, it makes no difference
as to time, whether a beat must be made to each
Quarter or Eighth, the lower figure simply says, that
an Eighth note, or that a Quarter is required to each
beat.
You would sing a hymn as fast in one as the other,
the movement is the same.
LESSON TL
MELODICS.
The Scale. — When we consider Tones in regard
to their relative pitch, higher or lower, or better to
Bay, in a certain series, ascending, and descending in
regular order, we form the Diatonic Scale.
The scale consists of the number of eight tones in
regular succession, named from the lower upward,
thus: one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight; the
eight, would, however, become one again in a next
higher ascending scale.
Intervals. — The difference of pitch between any of
the tones of the Scale is called an Interval,
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. Would a tune be sung just as fast, or the move*
2
4
ment be the same whether -4- or -#- measure ?
A. Yes.
Q. How can we then tell whether to sing faster or
slower in certain parts of a tune.
A. There are generally certain signs and expressions,
as well as the style of the movement provided for.
However, the words must be consulted (if in vocal
music), what kind of movement will bring out the
truest expression.
Q. What department have we so far been studying?
A. Rhythmics.
Q. How do you know.
A. The subject is Length.
Q. What is a certain series of tones ascending or
descending in regular progression called ?
A. The Diatonic scale.
Q. Of how many tones does this scale consist ?
A. Of eight. ,
Q. How are they named ?
A. From the lower upward; one, two, etc.
Q. What peculiarity is noticed by the eight ?
A. It becomes one again of a next higher ascend-
ing scale.
Q. What is the difference between any two tones
of the Scale called?
A. An Interval.
Q. Are these Intervals all alike?
A. No, some are longer, others smaller?
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
9
Steps and Ha!f-steps. — There are two kinds of
Intervals, larger and smaller, in the regular progres-
sion of the Diatonic Scale, the larger ones are called
Steps, the smaller, Half-steps.
The first half-step is found between the tones three
and four ; the second, between seven and eight ; the
other five Intervals are Steps,
The Diatonic Scale then represents seven Intervals,
five of them being steps, two of them half-steps.
Teacher and Pupil,
Q. What are the large ones called? A. Steps.
Q. The smaller are said to be what? A. Half-steps.
Q. How many Steps and Half-steps have we in the
Diatonic scale ? A. Five steps and two half-steps.
Q. How many intervals altogether? A. Seven.
Q. Where do you find the Half-steps.
A. Between three and four, seven and eight.
Q. Where the steps ?
A. Between one and two, two and three, four and
five, five and six, six and seven.
Q. What is the Diatonic scale sometimes called?
A. A musical ladder.
MUSICAL LADDER FORMING THE WIVES OF THE DIATONIC SCALE.
Ascending Scale,
Step,
. 4 -I Fa.
I Half step.
J JUL.
_B I Sol,
St
JJau
■8-
Halfstep.
Si,
Step.
5-
Sttp.
Step,
Sol*
-1-8-
-7—
— 6 —
— 6-
— 4-
— 3-
•2-
•1— J
10
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
•
LESSON TIL
MELODICS.
Syllables. — As an aid to all who wish to learn to
read music, especially in classes, the following syl-
lables are used in connection with the tones of the
Diatonic scale. (Be it, however, clearly understood,
that these syllables are not the names of these tones,
but are only used to name the relative pitch of the
tones in any Scale, in order to simplify the reading
of Music.)
SYLLABLES.
Bo, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Si, Do.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
These are Italian syllables, and are pronounced, —
Doe, Ray, Mee, Faw, Sole, Law, See, Doe.
l,
2, 3,
Do, B.<s*
Hi, Ta,
^scettdittg
Scale
Sol, La, Si, Do Si, ^ s ^ S, 2> ,
lending do*!*' Ml> **, ^
SYLLABLES OP THE SCALE.
We have now the Scale represented,
1st. By the names of the tones of the same, thus:
one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eigld.
2d. By the syllables.
Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Si, Do.
Note.— The idea presented to the pupil by the introduction
of the syllables is, the association of the tones of the Scale
with the syllables becomes so intimate with the Pitch, as to
call the same instantly to mind.
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. What are the syllables called which are used
in vocal music to aid the pupil in reading the same ?
A. Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Si, Do.
Q. Are they the names of tones ?
A. No.
Q. What do they represent, or name?
A. The relative Pitch of the tones of the Scale.
Q. From what language are they taken ?
A. From the Italian.
Q. Which is the first? A. Do. Q. Which the
second ? A. Re. Q. Which are alike in name ?
A. The first and eight.
Sing the tones of the Scale, using the syllables,
(taking care to pronounce the same correctly, not say-
ing Sal for Sol, etc.; articulate distinctly so every
tone is separate.)
Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Si, Do.
Also the following by syllables.
Do, Re.
L, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
Do, Mi.
1, 3, 2, 3, 2, 1, 3, 2, 1.
1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 4, 1, 2, 1, 4, 1, 3, 4, 3, 2, L
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 4, 5, 3, 5, 2, 5, 1, 5, 3, 1.
1, 3, 5, 6, 1, 6, 5, 6, 4, 6, 3, 6, 2, 6, 1.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 1, 7, 2, 7, 3, 7, 4, 7, 5, 7, 6,
7, 8.
1, 3, 5, 8, 5, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 3, 4, 1, 4, 5, 1, 5, 8.
1, 3, 2, 4, 3, 5, 4, 6, 5, 7, 6, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
1, 4, 6, 8, 6, 4, 1, 3, 6, 8, 6, 3, 1.
Q. What is the correct and distinct sounding of
each tone of the Scale called?
A. Good articulation.
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
11
1ESS0N Tin.
MELODICS.
Staff. — There being eight tones, each differing in
pitch from the other, we must have something to re-
present this difference ; and for this purpose, we have
five parallel lines with the four intervening spaces,
called the Staff.
Degrees. — Each line, and every space, is called a
Degree; thus we have nine degrees on the staff, five
of them being lines, and four, spaces.
They count from the lower one upward ; thus the
first line is the first degree, the first space is the
second, etc.
Added Lines and Spaces. — There are often small
lines added above or below the staff, and between the
same are caused the added spaces.
(Remember that the Staff is complete with its five
lines and four spaces.)
THE STAFF COMPLETE.
Degrees.
H
-9 1
ft 7
_ 3_
4
0
THE STIFF WITH ADDED LINES AND SPACES.
■ 2d ditto.
1st added line above.
1st added spare above.
i
1st added space below.
-1st added line below.
-2d ditto.
Teacher and PujnL
Q. What are the five lines and four spaces called ?
A. The Staff.
Q. How many degrees does the Staff consist of?
A. Nine.
Q. How many of them are lines ?
A. Five.
Q. How many spaces ?
A. Four.
Q "What does the Staff represent ?
A. The difference of Pitch.
Q. Do the small lines and spaces above or below
the staff belong to it, or are they added ?
A. They are added.
Q. What other name than the first line couid you
give for the same ?
A. First degree.
Q. For the first space ?
A. Second degree.
Q. Is the staff of a Rhythmic or a Melodic char-
acter ?
A. Melodic.
Q. Why?
A. It represents Pitch.
Q. Is the representation of the Staff here given,
with its added lines or spaces complete, as regards the
compass usually comprised in vocal music?
A. Yes, it is.
Q. Is the lower line always the first?
A. Yes,
ELEMENTAEY DEPARTMENT.
Added lines above.
7~Added spaces above.
Lines.
I
Spaces, p
Added lines below. Added spaces below.
The above represents the Staff, with added lines and
spaces, on which all vocal music is written.
LESSON IX.
MELODICS.
Cleffs. — As there is a marked difference between
the adult male and female voice, and in order to give
each class of voices their separate staff, we will in-
troduce characters representing its appropriate class.
These characters, so to say, give us the Key to the
voices to be represented, they are called Cleffs.
The Treble Cleff ttK represents the staff suited in
pitch to female and childrens* voices.
The Bass Cleff O, or (& represents the staff suited
in pitch to the adult male voice.
For the purpose of simplifying the reading of
music for the higher male voices, a separate cleff is
sometimes given, called the C Cleff, hi or Tenor.
The Staff with the different cleffs.
Treble. Bass, C, or Tenor Cleft
I
or
I
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. Which other line beside 1 and 5 is easily dis-
tinguished ?
A. The 3d, it being in the centre.
Q. What are the characters called which indicate
the class of voices represented by the staff?
A. Cleffs.
Q. Which Cleff represents female voices ?
A. The Treble.
Q. Which the adult male ?
A. The Bass.
Q. Which class of male voices is represented by
the C, or Tenor cleff?
A. The higher males voices.
Q. By what is the Pitch of the staff named in
either cleff?
A. By the first seven letters of the alphabet, A,
B, C, etc
Q. Does the Pitch, or the letters representing the
same ever change, or are they always the same ?
A. They never change the pitch of their natural
degrees.
ELEMENTABY DEPARTMENT.
The different Pitches are named by the first seven
letters of the alphabet.
g
w
— 3-
-Q--
--t E
-G
-B
-D
-F-
"E
T~T
The compass of the human voice represented in
both cleffs.
I
p
B
r
D^
pF^-
^
&
B'
.D
E
F^-
B
:d
E
F1
-C-A'or middle -C~
Notk. — As a Guide to the letters on the lines of the Treble staff,
Every, Good, Boy, Does, Finely.
1," 2, 3, 4, 5.
The Treble cleff on the staff) with added lines and
spaces.
-a-bC
Bass or F cleff.
-E-
-G-
-B
37
i)
T
-F
c;
-A-
B
-O
^
,-E-
F-t* —
It
<:
i)
E
.pj
<t
B
-c-
i>
-E-
Teacher and PuptL
Q. "What fe the first line of the staff in the Treble
cleff called ?
A. E; 2d line, G; 3d, B j 4th, D; 5th, F.
Q. What five words would form a Guide?
A. Every, Good, Boy, Does, Finely.
Q. What word do the four spaces spell ?
A. F, A, C, E— Face.
Q. The Treble cleff winds around which line?
A. The second.
Q. What is its name ?
A. G.
Q. What is this Cleff sometimes called?
A. The G cleff.
Q. What other name has the middle line between
the Bass and Treble cleff?
A. Middle C.
Q. What is the Letter or Pitch name for the first
line of the Bass cleff?
A. G; 2d, B; 3d, D; 4th, F; 5th, A.
14
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
The Tenor or C cleff usually represents the same
letters as the Treble cleff, only the Pitch is eight
tones, or an octave lower, being for male voices.
Guide to the letters of the lines in Bass cleff.
Good, Boys, Do, Finely, Always.
A —
9
-D-
-F-
tr
E"
TT
-G-
Guide to the spaces. All, Oases, Easy, Grained.
The Scale placed on the staff.
, ... i | ,
3=2
H 1-
"*
Do,
Re,
Mi,
Fa,
Sol,
La,
m
Si, Do.
£V
4>
0
&
i
^'^=i
_
£
~
w
i
i
Br -
r
— t
-P—
1 1 1
1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8, or 1
of a next higher.
It will be noticed that one and eight are the most
important tones of the Scale; indeed, the same would
not seem finished by omitting this tone, it is called
the Key-note.
LESSON X.
MELODICS.
The Staff and Model Scale.— The scale will always
take its name from the Letter or Pitch upon which it
Teacher and PupiL
Q. What is the Guide?
A. Good, Boys, Do, Finely, Always.'
Q. What is the name of the first space?
A. A; 2d, C; 3d, E; 4th, G.
Q. What Guide have you ?
A. All, Cases, Easy, Gained.
Q. What letters are usually represented by the
Tenor cleff?
A. The same as the Treble.
Q. How much difference is in the Pitch between
the two clefls ?
A. Eight tones, or an octave.
Q. How many Octaves are comprised in the Com-
pass for the human voice?
A. Three octaves.
Q. Which seems to be the most important tone of
the Diatonic scale?
A. The first or eight.
Q. By what peculiar name is this first or eighth tone
known ?
A. It is called the Key-note.
Q- Why?
A. Because it is the foundation of our Scale as well
as the end of the same. It forms our Base of con-
struction, or better, the key to the Structure.
Q. What kind of Pitch do letters represent.
A. Absolute Pitch.
Q. How are Scales upon a Staff named, or what
gives them their name ?
A. The letter upon which they are founded.
Q. What would a Scale be called when founded
upon the letter C?
A. The Scale of C, or the Model scale.
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
IS
is founded, thug, when a Scale is founded on the Letter
or Pitch of C, it is called the Scale of C.
(It is often known by the Natural scale though it
is no more so, than any other.)
"We will call it the Model scale.
The Model Scale with its Pitch, Syllahles, and Scale Names.
-+-4-I
i
-J. o «
jd—0
S 0
Pitch. C, D, E, F, G, A, B, C.
Syllables. Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Si, Do.
Scale names. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 1.
Teacher and PwpiL
Q. "What is this Scale sometimes called?
A. The Natural scale.
Q. Is this scale more natural than any other?
A. No.
Q. "What is the Pitch of our Key-note?
A. The Pitch is C.
Q. Is there any difference between saying Scale, or
Key?
A. A scale requires the tones to follow in regular
succession upward or downward, while in a Key,
tones may be placed to any position of the staff, and
still belong to the key.
Soprano,
CLASSIFICATION OF VOICES IN SEPARATE STAFFS.
3
Tenor.
JBass,
"?y ' i^™
m
- 1
-&■
-<s>-
J2-
~Z?r
-&-
-&-
-&-
JS-
-&-
-G>-
JU-
JZ2-
-0-
^_:.<z
J2-
—&-
C~
-{?-
-GL.
I
G. A, B, C, D, E, F, G, A, B, C, D, £, F, G, A, B, J}, D, E, F. G.
16
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
The four parts are here presented with their usual
compass, each extending to about an octave and a half,
and each upon their separate staff.
Music is also written with the four parts upon only
two staffs, when the Bass and Tenor take the lower, and
the Alto and Soprano the upper staff.
Teacher and Pupit.
Q. How can we tell, if a pieces of music is writtea
in the Key of C. A. Because there are no characters,
or any signs placed on the staff to change it from the
Model scale ; the half step is not changed.
Q. Must the half step then always be retained be-
tween 3 and 4, and 7 and 8 of the Diatonic scale.
A. Yes, it must.
THE FOUR PARTS WRITTEN ON TWO STAFFS.
A brace shows us how many staffs are to be used
at the same time; it connects the stafis which are
required for the different parts.
In an exercise like the foregoing, it may be asked,
how do we know what the several Notes are called ?
for while all four parts show the Letters plainly, how
can we read by the syllables ? The first question, have
we the Key of C? is answered. One, then falls on the
letter C, like in Bass and Alto. By counting from C
upward, the pupil will find that the Tenor note, G, is
the fifth from C, in the Bass ; that the Soprano is E,
the third from C, in the Alto; consequently, we must
have the fifth tone, or Sol, in the tenor, and the third
tone, or Mi, in the Soprano.
Q. How many part3 have we usually in music?
A. Four.
Q. How do we obtain four parts, when we have only
two class of voices, male and female.
A. Each class is divided into higher and lower voices.
Q. "What are the lower male voices called? A. Bass.
Q. The higher? A. Tenor.
Q. What the lower female voices? A. Alto.
Q. The higher? A. Soprano.
Q. About how far does the compass of each voice
extend? A. One octave and a half.
Q. How do the voices range in pitch ?
A. The lower are Bass, the next Tenor, next Alto,
and the highest, Soprano.
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
Jtemember, that the Key-note is always One of the
scale.
Should a piece of music commence with either three
or live, you can readily determine the same by count-
ing from the Key-note upward ; one, two, etc., or if
downward, eight, seven, etc.
LESSON XI.
MELODICS.
Transposition. — The pupil will no doubt, by the
foregoing lesson, foel interested to know how to tell
when the Key-note falls on any other letter than C,
and why the change.
It has been noticed, that the half step in the Dia-
tonic scale must come between 3 and 4, and 7 and 8 ;
this will leave the half steps on the staff between the
letters E and F, and B and C.
But if a character like this (8), called a Sharp, be
placed upon the degree F, the effect of which will be
to cause that letter to be raised or sharpened to the
amount of a half step, and would consequently bring
the pitch of Vt a whole step distant from degree E ;
this would disarrange the Diatonic scale in leaving
a Step instead of a Half-step between three and four
of the scale ; therefore we must find a new resting
place for the Key-note, so as to retain the half-step in
the scale.
The quickest way to find the new position for the
Key-note is, that the last sharp placed on the staff
represents the seventh tone of the New scale, and the
»ext degree above is the Key.
Teacher and Pupil,
Q. What use is the Brace? A. It shows how many
staffs are to be used to carry the parts.
Q. Is One or Do always the same as the Key-note?
A. We will say yes ; for the present let it be so un-
derstood.
Q. How would we proceed, suppose an exercise does
not commence with the Key-note? A. Count the
degrees from the key upward, if above; downward,
if below it ; whatever number of the degree the note
is placed on gives the corresponding number of Scale
tone.
Q. Is the Key-note always placed on C ? A. No.
Q. What other letter may it be placed on ?
A. Either of the seven.
Q. What causes the removal ?
A. Characters called Sharps, Flats, etc.
Q. What position do these characters assume when
changing our Key-note ? A. The position of Key-
sign ; or, better called, Signature.
Q. What is said to take place? A. Transposition.
Q. Why do Signatures change the Key?
A. The effect of them on the degrees of the staff
is to change the order of Intervals from the Model scale.
Q. What effect has the Signature of one sharp on
the fifth line?
A. It raises the same in pitch a half-step.
Q. Does it effect any other degree?
A. Yes, the first space.
Q. Why ? A. Because it is the same letter as the
fifth line.
Q. Do Signatures then effect the letters upon which
they are placed, wherever they may be found ?
A. Yes.
18
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
TRANSPOSITION BY SHABPS.
7JL_._#_
=f
-5-^-
EJE
Here the degree F is effected by the sharp placed
upon it, which becomes the Signature.
Tone seven is represented by the last sharp, con-
sequently 8, or the Key-note, stands next above on the
letter G; or, counting downward, we find 1 on the
second line, G; either way of counting is correct.
One sharp, then, is the key of G. The pupil will
find the first half-step between B and C, and the
second between F# and G.
Key of D. Key of A,
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. Must the half-step be between 3 and 4, and 7 and
8, in the new key or scale, as well as in the model one ?
A. It dare never be changed in any scale.
Q. Can you give me any guide by which to detect
instantly the new position for the Key-note ?
A. The quickest way to detect it is, the last sharp is
always degree seven of the new scale ; that is, the line
or space, or the letter upon which it stands is the pitch
seven of the Diatonic scale. Again, the degree above
the last sharp is the Key-note.
Q. What is the name of the Key by the signature
of one sharp ? A. Key of G.
Q. What is, then, the Signature to the Key of G ?
A. One sharp ; two sharps is the key of D ; three
sharps, A ; four sharps, E ; five sharps, B ; six, Fit
Q. Why F8 ? A. Because the degree F is effected
by the signature, a half-step.
Key of E. Key of B. Key of FJ.
P
-2-2
ii*
Two Sharps,
Do on D.
#=*■
Three Sharps,
Do on A.
8-
3=^£
Four Sharps,
Do on E.
^if-S-7-S."
it-f-7
Five Sharps,
Do on B.
s
tt~78~*
Six Sharps.
Do on Ffc
Thus it will be found in all transpositions by sharps,
the last, or the right hand sharp, represents always
degree seven of the New scale.
The pupil will remember that tone one, or eight, is
the Key-note, consequently we count the syllables Do
from that position.
Do, one, or eight, is all the same thing in the scale.
Q. What is the signature to the key of D?
A. Two sharps. Q. The key of A? A. Three
sharps. Q. E? A. Four sharps. Q. B? A. Five
sharps. Q. Fit? A. Six sharps.
Q. Do these signatures always remain on the de-
grees where they are placed, or may we place them to
any other degree? A. They have their fixed posi-
tion, and dare noi Je changed.
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
19
LESSON XII.
MELODICS.
Transposition by Flats.— A character used to lower
or flatten a Degree, a half-step is called a Flat b.
If a flat be placed on the third line of the staff*, it
■would lower that Degree to the amount of a half-
step ; consequently it would leave a whole step between
the Pitch of the third line, or Bb, to C, and would also
disarrange the order of steps and half-steps of the
Model scale. Therefore, we must, like by the sharps,
find a new home for the Key-note.
The last flat always represents the fourth tone of
the new scale.
Key of F. Do on F.
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. What effect has a flat when placed upon any
degree of the staff?
A. It lowers or flattens the same on6 half-step.
Q. Have they the same effect on the degree of the
staff, when placed as signatures as the sharps?
A. The same rule applies to flats, as by transposi-
tion of sharps, only flats lower the degrees, while sharps
raise them.
Q. Does the effect of Signatures apply to each staff,
or until it is removed by another ?
A. Till removed by another signature; thus, a key
may change within any staff by placing another signa-
ture, or recalling the one we have.
Q. What is the guide for the signatures of flats?
A. The last flat represents degree four, or tone four,
of the new scale.
Key of Bfr.
Two flats, B|j.
Key of Efc.
Three flats,
Do on Etj.
fe
-TT?^—
-5* 1—
Four flats,
Do on A(j.
r^ii
Key of Dfo.
Key of Gfo.
*M>
seeIee
Five flats,
Do on Dfr.
P
%
±:
:YT^z=J:
Six flats,
Do on G|j.
20
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT,
It will be noticed that another Guide in flats is, that^
the one previous to the last shows the Key-note, or
where one or Do comes.
GUIDE FOE FLATS.
I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
Four, Boys, Eat, Apple, Dumplings, Greedily.
GUIDE FOE SHAEPS.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
Go, Down, And, Eat, Breakfast, First.
LESSON XHL
MELODICS.
Intervals. — The distance from any one tone of the
Scale to any other, is called an Interval; the Interval
from one to two, or two to three, etc., is called a, Second.
The Interval from any one to its third higher, is
called a Third; to its fourth higher, a Fourth; to its
fifth higher, a Fifth; to its sixth higher, a Sixth; to
its seventh higher, a Seventh; to its eighth higher, an
Octave.
Intervals always reckon upward, unless otherwise
specified. Two tones of the same pitch are said to be
in Unison,
Major and Minor Intervals.— A Second consisting
of a half-step, like from Mi to Fa, is a Minor second.
A Second of a Step, like Do to Re, is a Major second.
A Third consisting of a Step and Half-step, is called
a Minor third.
A Third consisting of two Steps, is called a Major
third.
A Fourth consisting of two Steps and Half-step, is
called a Perfect fourth.
Teacher- and Pupil.
Q. Are there any other Guide ?
A. The one previous to the last flat, is the Kev.
One flat is the Kev of F ; Two flats, Bb ; Three,
Eb ; Four, Ab ; Five, "Db ; Six, Gb Q. What is the
signature to the Key of F? A. One flat. Q. To the
KeyofBb? A. Two flats. Q. Eb? A. Three flats.
Q. Ab? A. Four flats. Q. Db? A. Five flats.
Q. Gb ? A. Six flats.
Q. What is the Key Guide to flats?
A. Four, Boys, Eat, Apple, Dumplings, Greedily.
Q. What is the Key Guide to sharps ?
A. Go, Down, And, Eat, Breakfast, First.
Q. What is the difference between any two tones of
the Scale called ? A. Interval.
Q. What is a Second ? A. The Interval from any
tone to its next higher.
A. What is a third ? A. The Interval from a tone
to its third ?
Q. What is a Fourth? A. The Interval from a
tone to its fourth.
Q. What is a Fifth ? A. The Interval from a tone
to its fifth.
Q. What is a Sixth ? A. The Interval from a tone
to its sixth.
Q. AVhat is a Seventh? A. The Interval from a
tone to its seventh ?
Q. What is an Octave? A. The Interval from a
tone to its eighth. Intervals reckon upward, unless
otherwise specified.
Q. Are these Intervals, seconds, thirds, etc., all
alike, or is there a difference?
A. They a,re not alike j some are larger, others
smaller ?
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
21
A Fourth consisting of three Steps, is called a Sharp
fourth.
A Fifth consisting of two Steps and two Half-steps,
is called a Flat fifth.
A Fifth consisting of three Steps and one Half-step,
is called a Perfect fifth.
A Sixth consisting of three Steps and two Half-steps,
is called a Minor sixth.
A Sixth consisting of four Steps and one Half-step,
is called a Major sixth.
A Seventh consisting of four Steps and two Half-
steps, is called a Flat seventh.
A Seventh consisting of five Steps and one Half-
step, is called a Sharp seventh.
An Octave consists of five Steps and two Half-steps.
There are other Intervals, but as they are not gen-
erally studied, unless the science of harmony is the
subject of study, (where special works are needed)
they are here omitted.
LESSON XIV.
MELODICS.
Intermediate Tones and Chromatic Scale.— Between
any of the tones of the Scale where the Interval is a
step, a new tone, called Intermediate (Intervening),
may be formed; this is done by the use of sharps t and
flats b, and in certain keys, by the use of a character
called a natural fl, which, as its name implies, will leave
a degree natural.
Thus, we may have five Intermediate tones, as there
are five Intervals of a Step each, in the Diatonic scale.
Accidentals. — These sharps, flats, etc., when form-
ing Intermediate tones, are called Accidentals. The
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. What kind of a second from E to F?
A. A smaller or Minor second.
Q. What kind from C to D.
A. A larger or Major second.
Q. What kind of third is a Step and Half-step?
A. Minor? Q. What kind of third, two Steps?
A. Major. Q. What kind of fourth, two Steps and
Half-step? A. Perfect. Q. What kind of fourth,
three Steps ? A. Sharp. Q. What kind of fifth, two
Steps and two half? A. Flat. Q. What kind of
fifth, three Steps and one half? A. Perfect. Q. What
kind of sixth, three Steps and two half? A. Minor.
Q. What kind of sixth, four Steps and one half?
A. Major. Q. What kind of seventh, four Steps and
two half? A. Flat. Q. What kind of seventh, five
Steps and one half? A. Sharp. Q. What kind of In-
terval, five Steps and two half? A. Octave.
Q. Unison consists of what?
A. The same pitch.
Q. What are the tones called which may be formed
between any tones of the Scale where the Interval is
a step ?
A. Intermediate.
Q. What effect has a sharp on a Degree ?
A. It raises the degree a half step.
Q. What is the effect of a flat?
A. It lowers a half step.
Q. What efiect has a natural ?
A. It restores a degree to its natural pitch, or re-
moves the efiect of b or t.
(J. What are these characters called, when found
within any measure of a tune?
A. Accidentals.
22
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
tones produced by the use of Accidentals are called
Intermediate.
The effect of Accidentals continue through the
measure. Should the pitch of the same degree pass
to the next measure uninterrupted, it will effect the
next measure also.
Chromatic Scale. — If you add the Intermediate
tones in regular progression with the tones of the
Diatonic scale, we form the Chromatic scale, which
consists of twelve Intervals, each being a half step,
thus : —
l, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
One. Sharp One. Two. Sharp Two. Three. Four.
7, 8, 9, 10, n,
Sharp Four. Five. Sharp Five. Six. Sharp Six.
12,
Seven.
13.
Eight.
13, 12, 11,
Tones descending, — Eight. Seven. Flat Seven.
10, 9, 8,
Six. Flat Six. Five.
*7 A "k
Flat Five. Four. Three.
4, 3, 2, l.
Flat Three. Two. Flat Two. One.
Teacher and VwpnL
Q. What are the tones produced by the use of
Accidentals called ? A. Intermediate tones.
Q. How long will the effect of Accidentals hold
good ? A. Within the measure.
Q. When will it pass beyond ? A. When the pitch
continues to the next measure uninterrupted.
Q. What new scale is formed by the Intermediate
tones in connection with the tones of the Diatonic
scale ?
A. Chromatic scale.
Q. How many Intervals are found in the Chromatic
scale? A. Twelve.
Q. How many are half-steps? A. All.
Q. What are the names of these tones ?
A. One. Sharp One. Two. etc. Ascending by 8,
Eight. Seven. Flat Seven, etc., descending by b.
Q. How are the syllables, ascending ?
A. Do, Dee, Re, Ree, Mi, Fa, Fee, Sol, See, La,
Lee, Si, Do.
Q. Descending?
A. Do, Si, Say, La, Lay, Sol, Say, Fa, Mi, May, Re,
Ray, Do.
Q. Name the letters in C Scale ascending ?
A. C, Of, D, Dt, E, F, F*, G, G* A, A*, B, C; de-
scending; B, Bb, A, Ab, G, Gb, F, E, Efe, D, Db, C.
Do, Ascending.
^=^m
^t
CHROMATIC SCALE.
Do. Descending.
4-
Do.
P2:
25>:
^
J2-
'£
^:
r
s^
^
-&■
fet
Do, Dee, Re, Ree, Ml, Fa, Fee, Sol, See, La, Lee, BL Do, Si, Say, La, Lay, Sol, Say, Fa, Mi, May, Re, Ray, Do.
E
-&•
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
23
LESSON XT.
MELODICS.
Minor Scales. — There is still another Scale, consist-
ing also of eight tones, but differing in the order of
intervals from the Diatonic scale, which has already
been explained. This new scale is called the Minor
scale, (or Diatonic Minor scale.)
The Minor scale will be found to be especially
suited to any j)laintive expression, or sympathetic
emotion, while the former Diatonic scale, which we
will call the Major scale, seems to be suited more
especially to any joyous, cheerful, etc., expression.
There are three forms of the Minor scale used in
music.
The Natural Minor, said to be so because it retains
all the tones of the Diatonic scale, commencing with
La, as tone one; Si, tone two, etc.
La, Si, Do, Ke, Mi, Fa, Sol, La.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
It will be noticed this brings the half step between
tones 2 and 3, and 5 and 0, La is the Key-note. (This
scale is seldom used.)
The Melodic Minor introduces both sharp Six and
sharp Seven, (that is, Fa and Sol are both taken away
and in place Fee and See are used,) in ascending,
while it descends natural, —
La, Si, Do, Re, Mi, Fee, See, La.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
La, Sol, Fa, Mi, Re, Do, Si, La.
8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
The Melodic Minor scale is sometimes called the
Irregular form, because, with its ascending minor, it
descends with the natural form.
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. What other Scale have we besides those already
introduced ? A. The Minor scale.
Q. How can a Minor generally be detected from a
Major? A. By its plaintive, sympathetic expression.
Q. How can a Minor otherwise be detected ?
A. Its distinguishing feature from the Major is its
Minor third, Step and Half-step.
Q. How can you tell the Natural form ?
A. It retains all the tones of the Diatonic scale.
Q. What is the Key-note ? A. La.
Q. How can you tell the Melodic form ?
A. It introduces the sharp Sixth and Seventh
ascending.
Q How can you tell the Harmonic form ?
A. It introduces the sharp Seventh.
Q. Is the Key-note always La in the Minor scales ?
A. It is.
Q. Name the letters of the Model scale, Natural
form? A. A, B, C, D, E, F, G, A.
Q. Model scale of Harmonic form?
A. A, B, C, D, E, F, G#, A.
Q. Of the Melodic form ascending ?
A. A, B, C, D, E, Ft, Gt, A.
Q. Descending ? A. A, G, F, E, D, C, B, A.
Q. Sing the syllables to the tones of the Harmonic
form? A. La, Si, Do, Re, Mi, Fa, See, La.
Q. Is the Minor scale more difficult to sing than the
Major?
A. They are generally looked upon as more difficult,
on account of some of the Intervals not being used in
the Diatonic scale. But mostly for want of practice.
Q. Is the harmony of Minor music good ?
A. The harmony is grand.
24
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
The Harmonic Minor differs from both forms, by
using the sharp Seven, both ascending and descend-
ing ; its tones are, —
La, Si, Do, Re, Mi, Fa, See, La.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
The half-steps are between 2 and 3, 5 and 6, and 7 and
8. In the Interval between 6 and 7, will be found a
step and half-step, while the other three Intervals
are steps.
Every Major key has its relative Minor, and every
Minor its relative Major key. The relative Minor is
Teacher and Pupu.
Q. Is Minor music more difficult to read than
Major ? A. Not particularly so.
Q. Would you prefer Minor music to Major for
any solemn occasion ? A. Most assuredly.
Q. Why? A. The sympathetic emotions of the
heart are more quickly awakened by the strains of
the Minor chords.
Q. Is it necessary that the sympathies and emotions
of the heart should correspond with the expression or
effect desired to be produced ?
' A. The heart must feel what the voice speaks.
MODEL MINOR SCALES.
i
Natural Form.
&=&•
^:
^
-£-
-&-
E
j&, Si, Do, Be, Mi, Fa,
Melodic Form.
Sol, La.
ra
3
*3
•A
'-%?-
*2-
?c
s-
■&
I
4=2*
-&-
■&■
2t
La, Si. Do, Re, Mi, Fee, See, La, Sol, Fa, Mi, Re, Do,
A, B, C, D, E, Ffc Gfl, A, G, F, E, D, C,
Harmonic Form.
m
::s:
-&-
i
-&-
Si,
B,
4^-
La.
A.
i
-&-
-&-
~ZT
-<S>-
-g> «g-
-a &
La, Si, Do, Re, Mi, Fa, See, La.
always three degrees lower than the Major ; or if a
Major commences on any line, the Minor is always a
line lower ; spaces the same. Or a Major is always a
line or space higher than the Minor key.
A, B, C, D, E, F, Q% A.
Q. How can you detect quickest the relative Minor
to any Major key ? A. It is always the third degree
of the staff below the Major. Q. If a Major key
stands on the second line, where do you find the
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
Major Key-niflfe.
~Do.
-La.
Minor Key-note.
ggjJB
f
f
'T>o Major Key-note.
LLa Minor Key-note.
Teacher and PupiL
Minor? A. On the first line, or if Major, stands on
any space ; Minor, space lower. Q. How can you de-
tect quickest the Minor Key-note in sharps ? A. It is
found next degree below right-hand sharp. Q. How in
flats ? A. It is found on the line or the space above
the one where the last or right-hand flat is found.
Q. Name the keys of the Minor Model scale? A. A
Minor, one sharp; E Miner, etc. Q. Name signa-
] tore to Ft Minor ? A. Three sharos, etc.
SIGNATURES AND KEYS OF THE MINOR SCALES.
i
-<5>-
B.
-&-
w&
--&-
n-
&
Guide for sharps. The Minor key is always next below last sharp.
Guide for flats. The Minor Key-note is always the space or line above the one where the last flat is placed.
26
ELEMENTAItY DEPAKTMENT.
LESSON XTI.
MISCELLANEOUS.
Repeat. — Dots placed across the staff, -
• _
or -=-, called Repeat.
Endings.- ^"^^ "Sdrt^ called first and
second ending. Omit the second ending, when sing-
ing or playing the first time ; and in repeating, omit
the first ending, and pass to the second.
Pause. — >^N, to prolong beyond the usual time, to
hold or dwell on the tone; when above a rest, prolong
beyond its usual length.
Tie. — When two or more notes are on the same de-
gree, and connected by a curve P r, they stand for one
sound, prolonged to the time indicated by the notes.
Da Capo. — D. C, means the beginning ; or better, go
to the beginning.
Dal Segno. — D. S. the sign, or go to the sign, ;£.
Fine. — Finish or close, the end.
Syncopation. — Syncopate, when accenting any unac-
cented part of a measure and going to the accented
part.
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. What is the meaning of dots placed across the
staff?
A. To repeat a certain part.
Q. What is meant by 1st time, 2d time?
A. First and second ending.
Q. What shall we do ?
A. First time omit second ending, in the repeat
omit first ending.
Q. WThat is meant by a pause?
A. To prolong the time beyond that indicated by
the note or rest over which it stands.
Q. What is the meaning of a tie ?
A. Notes standing on the same degree, when con-
nected by a tie, shall be held, as if the same where
only one tone prolonged to the time indicated by the
notes.
Q. What is the meaning of D. C ?
A. Da Capo.
Q. What shall we do?
A. Go to the beginning.
Q. What is the meaning of D. S. ?
A. Dal Segno.
Q. What does it indicate?
A. Go to the sign :J\
Q. What is the meaning of the word Fine?
A. Finish or close.
Q. What is syncopation ?
A. To accent a unaccented part of a measure, and
pass to the accented part.
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
LESSON XYH.
DYNAMICS.
Form of Tones. — If it is true, as stated, that the
heart must be in sympathy with the subject, and the
expression and effect desired to be produced, there must
be, especially by a company of performers, some cer-
tain signs, guides, or rules given by which all can be
governed in regard to expression.
Mezzo. — A tone formed with medium power, the
abbreviation is m; pronounced Met-zo.
Piano. — A tone softer than mezzo, rather a soft
tone, abbreviation p; pronounced Pee-ali-no.
Pianissimo. — A very soft tone, abbreviation pp; pro-
nounced Pee-ah-nis-si-mo.
Forte. — A tone louder than mezzo, rather a loud tone,
abbreviation/; pronounced For-te.
Fortissimo. — A very loud tone, abbreviation ff, pro-
nounced For-tis-si-mo.
Mezzo Piano. — Medium soft,
mp.
Mezzo Forte. — Medium loud, mf.
Organ Form. — Commenced, continued, and ended
with the same degree of power ; it is also called Organ
Tone, zzz.
Crescendo, Ores., commence soft, increasing to loud ;
pronounced Cre-shen-do, sign, — ==C^.
Diminv^ndo, Dim., commence loud, diminishing to
Boft; pronounced Dim-in-oo-en-do, sign,
Swell. — Union of Ores, and Pirn
Pressure Form. — Sudden Ores., sign, <, or O.
Sforzando. — Sudden Dim., explosive sign. >, or sf,
9X.
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. What is the third department called ?
A. Dynamics.
Q. What is meant by it? A. Musical expression;
or all that which treats of force or power, giving life
and soul to music.
Q. What is a tone called that is formed with me-
dium power? A. Mezzo.
Q. What is the abbreviation ? A. m.
Q. A soft tone ? A. Piano.
Q. Abbreviation? A. p.
Q. A very soft tone ? A. Pianissimo.
Q. Abbreviation? A. pp.
Q. A loud tone ? A. Forte.
Q. Abbreviation? A. f.
Q. A very loud tone ? A. Fortissimo.
Q. Abbreviation ? A. ff.
Q. A medium soft tone ? Mezzo piano.
Q. Abbreviation? A. mp.
Q. Mezzo Forte means what? A. Medium loud.
Q. What is the abbreviation ? A. mf.
Q. What is an Organ Tone?
A. A tone commenced, continued, and ended with
the same power.
Q. What is said of Crescendo?
A. Commencing soft and increasing to loud.
Q. What is Diminuendo?
A. Commencing loud and diminishing to soft.
Q. What of a Swell ? A. Union of ( res. and Dim.
Q. Of a Pressure Tone? A. Sudden crescendo.
Q. Of Sforzando? A. Sudden diminuendo.
28
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
LESSON XYIII.
t
DYNAMICS.
Tones and Movement — Is an important musical
expression for the teacher to dwell on to impress
upon his pupils, if he be a faithful teacher.
Legato. — Closely connected, smooth, gliding style,
^— — ^, the same is often used for a tie, Le-gah-to.
Staccato. — Short, distinct, pointed, Stackah-to, sign,
f ? 1 r.
Portamento. — Graceful, instantaneous gliding, or
anticipating the coming tone ; blending of one tone
with another.
Semi Staccato. — Medium between staccato and legato,
Martellato. — In distinct marking tones, energetic,
joyful style, nearly allied to sforzando, often indicated
by the same character, >.
Movements. — The styles of movements in common
use are, — Moderate, moderate; Allegro, fast ; Andante,
slow; Adagio, very slow; Allegretto, medium fast;
Andantino, medium slow.
Con spirito. — Spirited, or with spirit.
Presto. — Very quick.
Ritardo. — Slower, or ritard.
A tempo. — Original, or previous time.
LESSON XIX.
DYNAMICS.
Vocal Delivery.— The voice should dwell upon the
vowels only, and prolong carefully the required time.
Pronunciation in singing should be controlled by the
same rules that govern correct delivery in speech ;
no substitution can be allowed.
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. What should a teacher particularly try to im-
press his pupils with ?
A. Vocal delivery.
Q. What is meant by Legato?
A. A smooth, connected, gliding style.
Q. How shall this sign be used as a tie?
A. It will connect the same as if it were one tone
or sound.
Q. What is the opposite of legato called; that is, a
short, distinct, pointed style? A. Staccato.
Q. What is meant by Portamento ?
A. A graceful blending of one tone into another.
Q. What is Semi staccato ?
A. Medium between staccato and legato.
Q. What is Martellato?
A. A distinct, energetic, marking style.
Q. What is indicated by Movement?
A. The style or manner of singing or playing a
piece of music.
Q. What does Moderate mean ? A. Moderate.
Q. Allegro? A. Fast. Q. Andante? A. Slow.
Q. Adagio? A. Very slow. Q. Allegretto? A.
Medium fast. Q. Andantino? A. Medium slow.
Q. What does Con spirito mean? A. With spirit.
Q. What of Presto? A. Very quick.
(J. Ritardo, or Hit. ? A. Slower.
Q. What means A tempo, or Tempo?
A. Preceding time or movement.
Q. What is meant by good pronunciation?
. I . The correct and distinct sounding of the vowels,
Tonic element.
ELEMENTARY DEPARTMENT.
29
Let the pronunciation be distinct, rich, and full ;
and let the heart speak through the lips, to give
soul to the words and music.
Consonants should be uttered quickly, distinctly,
and with great precision ; avoid all indistinctness of
them in the articulation of the words ; yet there should
be no harshness in uttering them. Be careful that
you don't join them to the wrong word, like Snow-s
ave, for Snows have ; Rain-s ave; for Rains have
poured; Signal-s till, for Signals still; A-notion, for
An ocean; Lasts-till night, for Last still night; On
neither, for on either, etc.
Careful and distinct articulation, pronunciation, and
enunciation, are of the utmost importance.
Accent, Emphasis, Pause. — The pupil will remem-
ber that Accent, Emphasis, and Pause are some of the
beauties of elocution. If the soul of poetry is to be
brought forth, with the addition of musical expression,
the spirit of the words must be preserved in connec-
tion with the laws of music, yet the latter must never
be permitted to conflict or set aside the laws of elo-
cution. Let the Speech and Song unite and give a
liberal interpretation to both, to enable the Singer to
grasp the spirit of both, making the emotional char-
acter of the poetry his own, surrender himself to his
work, to produce living song, and so communicate
with the sympathies and emotional feelings of his
audience, that, both enraptured, shall experience a fore-
taste of the Grand Song, when all the Redeemed shall
join in that land where song and praise shall be for-
ever.
Teacher and Pupil.
Q. Must the voice dwell to the full value of the
note required on the vowel sound ? A. Yes.
Q. Can we not in a long tone dwell partly on the
Consonant? A. Never.
Q. Should the Consonants be sounded ? A. No.
Q. Must they be uttered quickly, distinctly, and
with great precision? A. Always.
Sing the following ; read it first : —
Haste thee, winter, haste away,
Far too long has been thy stay ;
Far too long thy winds have roared,
Snows have heat, and rains have poured ;
Haste thee, winter, haste away,
Far too long has been thy stay.
Q. What is said of Accent, Emphasis, and Pause
in regard to singing? A. The laws to which they are
subject in reading should also be generally preserved
in singing. Q. If poetry is to receive, in addition to
its beauties, a musical expression, must it not be
subject to its laws? A. Y"es, unless they should come
in conflict with the laws of elocution, which cannot
be permitted.
Q. What would be the best course to pursue in that
event? A. Give a liberal interpretation, uniting both
Speech and Song, to enable the singer to grasp the
spirit of both, but retaining the emotional character
of the poetry always.
Q. How will poetry and music be most effectually
united? A. By the performer making the poetry his
own, pouring forth, not the words from his lips only,
but speaking from his whole heart, with all the power
and emotion surrendered to song ; his audience will
catch the spirit, and both soar aloft enraptured in a
world of song.
so
PRACTICAL DEPARTMENT.
LESSON XX.
RHYTHMICS.
Measures.— Bars.— Rests.— Quarter Notes.— Half Notes.— Double Bars.— Accent.— Double Measure.—
Beating Time. —
i. r rlrflrrlft-lrrlr I r r I f II
2. Down up. d. u. Sing syllable Do.
. r r ir r L r r i r ? i r r \ r r \ r r i r *
3. Triple measure. Accent on down beat. Down, left, up.
r r rir^rir r r \ f* f i f r r if' r I r r r 1 1* f
4. Triple measure. Whole measure rest. Dotted half-note.
r r rirrri^i^'irrrir r r i r r f I ¥ "
5. Quadruple measure. "Whole-note. Accent down and right. Beats, — down, left, right, up.
rrrrifrri^ irrrrirrrrirrrri** i r r P
i
i
6. Sextuple measure, six beats. 7. Same measure, two beats.
rrr f" \hrhr \("(" \'° ' i rrrrrr \hr h ihh i#*
The following are the beats for Sextuple measure: — down, down, down, up, up, up. down, up.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. 1, 2.
8. Eighth notes, four beats. Sing Do. Articulate distinctly.
fcrrrlf rrrlr i/rlfrMirc/r i* i/irlfrHfrMI
PRACTICAL DEPARTMENT.
9. Sextuple measure, two beats. Quarter and Eighth notes ; Quarter rest.
tctz\r-tc\tiri\riti\rr\cTii
10. Double measure. Quarter and eighth notes. Sing Do. Measure rest.
31
int rA r II
r cm &G * i r cr i cr cr
LESSON XXI.
r tt\tir\r II
HELODICS.
Time marks. (Figures). Tone one, or Do ; two, Ke. 1st line, 1st space. Degree 1 and 2.
11. What measure ? Where accent?
do do re re do re do
It
1
-0-
I-
1
l r r i r~r-f-r-?-rr— H-r-r
f
i
2 2 12
12. What tone and degree added?
1 2 2 112 2 1
If tone one Is on first line, where is two? where three?
t'=f?=-T=rr^H
r i i 'if
^
rr
f
13. What do these figures indicate? Do they name the time? Pitch ?
do do
T
nn mi
-3 p-
*-r
14. Would figures alone be sufficient in measures 1 and 5? Why not? Would notes give the time? In-
dicate the pitch ? Are figures necessary ?
r'-p-1-*
0-S-
-#-5 P-h-
^r^=t
■l-F-#-l 0-1-
_ „ i w ij — *-»n — s~z
^t
-1 — &
15. What means the repeat? What first time ? What second time ?
!
iE||
r^
*=f
■g-i_e=t=e
tm
r
1 -i time. | v!<I time
=g— .-Li
4-4-
r
i
IS
PRACTICAL DEPARTMENT.
16. What kind of time ? What kind of notes ? If Do is on first line, where is Mi ? Re ? Fa ? Sol ?
P*
-0-5-
-i — 0-1-
I
p^f^rT^Hrr ' ir r ' ir ry-V^fa
17. Which are preferable, notes or figures ? Where is La if Do is on first line ?
r f T i f
rT
-^
II
18, Keep correct time. Which beats are accented? Do on first line, Mi on second.
^-t-F
-&-h—0 — 0-
rrrr-n
r
r-^
-0—0-
'-TT-
1— *-*-
I I
LESSON XXII.
MELODICS.
The Staff complete. — Diatonic Scale. How many degrees of the staff? How many tones in Diatonic
scale ? Which is the first ?
19. do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, si, do,
do,
:r
m
T'~r~i
0-3-
JEj£.
>-5-
jos:
-0-1—l-S-
V
1
-0-1-
-JEK.
>-5-
f
-0-3-
20. If Do, or one, is on the 2d line, where is two? three? four? six? eight? five?
r=f
i
1
T
£
1
21. If one, or Do, is on the first space, where is two ? four? five? three?
"i — r~J — '— J — i* m j J - ~j f f~~ "H — p — ]~~
l-J J ' * -.^,-^-J-f j* v * ^-_j — J j v «, r i i i_. p_ai— ^_
PRACTICAL DEPARTMENT.
33
22. Heading Do on 3d line, where is Ke? Mi? Fa? Sol (upper and lower) ? Si? La ?
c ^
^
1
i i
jb
)
I*
#
o~
| ! D ^J ^ ^ oP - 1 J.
xw
w
Iw
1
\w
~7»
r,*
j^
0 VL* 1.LT
°\
1
c^
1
t>#
hS
# -
1
1
i
1
23. Notice that Do may come on any degree of the staff. Always count up or down from the position of
the kev-note. 1
1st time.
2d time.
i
m
10 — h0-
-60-
Ht
4=
J 1-
*=3=»
24. Treble and Bass cleff. Letters. Model scale. Middle C. Added space.
i
•^ — *-
-+-
^
C D
do, re,
25. Model key. Do on C
E
mi.
F G
E
£
G
Ife
rt
3t*
H f-
-0—0-
±z£
xzi:
<*-*
-i — V
n=z
-*--«-
E
1 2 2 ml
re,
LESSON XXTTT.
MELODICS.
i
26. Kevs and signatures, (Sharps and Flats). Key of G.
Fine.
±2t
1 ! 1-
4 # ^ #
*=?
-*. 1-
+
:n:
(J
±=fc
1= f-
j* **
i&~'~ :
SI
PRACTICAL DEPARTMENT.
P
27. Key of what? Signature?
fen
J. H. K., from "Reward."
Pi
3=3
*=H*
-5 5
6 — 8a
e
1^'Z
3
1st time.
2d time.
?=±
si
a
-^ — #-
-d~#-
#~Tfc
T&1
1
i
jflg
■*-
1st time.
2d time.
Sac
^
1
■F
^
^*-
-F
-# — 1-
i
! — I F
5t
28. What key ? What signs ? What measure ? What sign D. S ? What Intermediate tone ? We must
begin with the up beat in this exercise.
|i
%
J. R. S., from " Reward."
=T
^^
v— «-
-JB
-ai ^
*
-&-Z-A
-#— H-
=3=
-«*-
-a — »-
Fine,
D.S.
*-—*-
-i (_
-^-T-
+ d •
at
^ — *
29. What key? Signature? Sign?
Fine.
^
J. C, from " Reward.
fcfc£=£:
-*-»-* ^ *
s
-0-0—0
B^EgE£BEE£*#MW^
F-^-ff-
-H — t-
£tete££
I
D.a 30..
^
3=;
k
1st.
»
£=¥
3^
-# — #-
H 1—
t— F
^
-# *
^?-
H2d. 1
:£=F^EEFE
PRACTICAL DEPARTMENT.
LESSON XXIY.
EXERCISES WITH DYNAMIC SIGNS.
31. Good pronunciation, enunciation, articulation. Sing from the heart.
Adagio, p
cres.
dim.
$
J. H. "£., from "Reward."
Plead my cause, oh, blessed Sa - viour, In - ter - ces - sor at the throne, Lord of mer - cy, show thy
D.S. Pi - ty my poor, lost con -
Finc.~. m . cres. =r^T D .S.
, cres.
"flg* »
*— 0-
f
fa - vor, Let thy blood for me a - tone. ) Look in pi - ty, love, corn-pas- sion, Lord, I beg at mercy's shrine.
09 di- tion, Save me by thy power di- vine. /
/ Allegretto.
>1 f
^
■-** i r^ '
r— N
•*—•-
h
f : • r.n! i
cres.
J. C, from " Reward."
t
^=±
-R N-
-*-*— 9 g 9-
Hark, what mean those holy voi - ces,
*=^t
\ — y,--r
fcfc
Sweetly sounding through the sky. Lo ! th' angel - ic host re
pp m
?—0
\ \
=S=fc
i
r\ fr i>
*> — 1-
4^0—0
^-fe-
-*-+
±f
A--A— N— k
4±4X 4 J *=F
*=£==
^ -x
t=^=±
f
joices, Heav'n-ly hal- le - lu-jahs rise. Listen to the wondrous sto- ry,
u f cres.
}—[ #-*- 0 0 0
V—^~
0—0—P — *-i-£? — £-4> y— ! h a
^l
Which they chant in hymns of joy, Glo - ry in the high- est, glo - ry,
Con spirito.
Listen to the wondrous sto-ry,
5v
''B-P-
-^ — /_ ^
-o
l
Glo- ry be to God on high.
3^?
*
i5>-
-^.i
y — P— [~y
P^P
Hal - le - lu - jah, praise the Lord, Hai - lo - lu - jah, praise the Lord, Hal - le - lu jah, praise the Loni.
36
PRACTICAL DEPARTMENT.
33. Let the pupils give the expression required by the words.
Moderate.
4
£
J. H. K., from ■ Reward."
£SS
2=£±tf
v-
^
0-
m
*
<-i-
tO^B=:
P
Sinner, haste, the call obey, Tread the straight and narrow way, Come with faith, and trust his word. Give thy heart unto the
\> ^ i * -fti i & * ■ h - -^ m , — s~ hr-
0-^-0-*— 0-
$
0^-?-0
~-h
\JSt
0-1
f^y*
W-
-*-*
-H \
fc>
-&-
zb
5
EI
i^-V-y-
-<$>-
Lord ; Do not falter, do not fear, Do not shed a falling tear, Jesus bids thee welcome here, Haste thee now, haste thee now.
LESSON XXY.
RHYTHMICS, MELODICS, DYNAMICS.
Pronunciation.— Enunciation. — Articulation.— Intermediate tones. Accent. Pause. Emphasis. De-
livery. \ time. Three beats to the measure, accent each beat.
34. . „.. . . . , . A.T.H., from "Reward."
/ Moderate con spirito.
cres.
-&
*=£
h
A'
-*—*-
!>•<»•
£=&t
hF
.m_
i=c
^
?
Come to Je - sus, be for - giv - en, Though thy path
dim. mf
seem dark as night ;
£
There's
£
-#-V
+—*
#-^H*
rv-V:
star that guides to hea - ven, Trust in
mf
m
?=*-
±=y
*--
£
God, and do the right,
m
fez:
Come to
#-r
£
rr
-#-■— iHr
Je • sua, Come just now; Come, sin-ner, to Je - sus. Be - fore
hjm
bow.
GOLDEE" SONGS.
Words by Miss Sarah Hamilton.
S7\
OH! WE LOVE TO COME.
+
fefcb
-0—0-
Chorus.
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
-0-0-
w m m
t f Oh! we love to come to our Sabbathhome, Where we learn of our teachers dear, ^There'sacrown,There'sacrown,There'sa
1 While thev point with love to our home above, And the crown that awaits us there. J , . , bright crown,
bright crown, ".#- /v\ £.*
■v-v-
s ft
i — v-v-x
>
t
:msm
m
s
^r *
— i — # #
0 0.0
fU
- 6
^^gPI
v^
crown for the children to wear, There's a crown, there's a crown, There's a beau - ti - ful crown over there.
over there, bright crown, brightcrown,
'*-«*■ ..-0- *- *-'+-*- * *- £ £ ^.-^ m __„ m ±'
■&
*:
•-*=£
V—P-
i .
2. Oh ! we love to come to our Sabbath home,
When the six days' toil is o'er.
Ami read and sin£ of onr heavenly King,
And learn to love Him more.
3. Oli ! we love to come to our Sabbath home,
But we would not come alone;
We would each bring in, from the depths of sin,
Some wretched, wand'ring one. oy
4. Whose feel now stray in the broad, broad way,
Who know not of God or heaven ;
And would bid them taste of the blessed feast,
Which our Father's love hath given.
5. Then toil we on till the race is won,
And the pearly gates unfold,
And we find our rest on the Saviour's breast,
At home in the city of gold.
38
GO WORK IN MY VINEYARD.
Words and Music by J. H. Kuezenknabe.
-I- — f>i — !-^=--f-i 1
-N—N-
*—1—*-^zz*i
Go work in my vineyard, the lab'rors are few, "Why will you in i - dleness stand? There's something for all, even
(Jo work in my vineyard, each dear little child Can find some slight errand of love; Somedeed donein kindness, some
Go work in my vineyard, ye youth of the land, Go bring your light hearts to the task ; Work cheerfully, knowing the
children to do,
word spoken mild,
Lord will attend,
Employment for each lit - tie hand.
May guide to the mansions a - hove.
And pay all the wages we ask.
Then on, take your station, no longer de-lay, Why
4 Go work in my vineyard in the prime of thy life,
The tenderest vine needs thy care;
Go hare thy strong arm for the blunt of the strife,
A liberal reward thou shalt share. — Chorus.
5 Go work in my vineyard ye aged and sad,
There's something remaining for you,
'Mid tear-drops, while toiling, the Lord makes thee glad,
Yes, soon will thy wages come due. — Chorus.
MISSIONARY'S FAREWELL. 39
UerfTcated to 3rr*s. II. B. iT.idt.ky, Missionary to Africa. Words and Music Rev. I .Baltzell.
'•{
On the shore beyond the sea,"W here
There's a call, a plaintive pica, I m
-#-•-#- -0-' -0- -0-' -0- -&■'
I the fields are bright and fair j hast . en t ^ ,
:-^
:ff£T£-S
rf±
■u-
&
^
■0- • -0- -0-' -0- -0-
r r r r \r
Tr-V-fr-Vr--r-
v—z-v-^
-0 ' 0
y y y
I can - not stay,
can - not stay,
m-tr
N— fe-^-Jh
^
^ZJt
-t=^=^
«^-4-
0 ' 0
lis the Mas ter call - ing nie, Let me
Master, 'Tis the Mas - ter
r n -f — - — f 1 — — f — #-tt— » ■ . li •
I must o-bey,
I must o - bey,
3*4
Na-tive land, farewell to thee
farewell to thee,
i-i.- 2.
^T I q iiark ! I hear the Master say,
g» I " Up, ye reapers ! why so slow !"
To the vineyard, far away,
Earthly kindred, let nie go. — Cho.
Just beyond the rolling tide,
The uplifted hand I see ;
g! L[ fr |# * "g — gr*~lg — jg"* ^ 1 fg* I The uplifted hand 1 see ;
r ' i jl 4 f 1 / i, -v! ->rj — 1 1- Jj° ! tnft gates ;ire °I)(M1 wide,
V | X ^ I/-V— V — ^ '• EHf**-| And the lost are calling me.— Cho.
.1
\is
4. Father, mother, darling child,
I must bid you all adieu;
Far away in Afric's wild,
There's a work for me to do. — Cho.
5. Bear me on, thou restless sea,
Let the winds the canvas swell;
Afric's shore I long to see ;
Dearest friends, farewell 1 farewell \—CM.
40 JESUS IS MIGHTY TO SAVE.
"Words by Mrs. Annie Wittenmyeb. By permission.
Music by Wm. G. Fische«.
1. All glo - ry to Je-sus. be giv'n,
2. From tbe darkness of sin and des - pair,
^t=&
£
r i I -d
I
That life and sal - va-tion are free; And all may be wash'd and for-
Out in - to the light of his love, He has brought me, and made me an
teU^LHL^HMn^
e^s
^
F
£
!±
s=a
v — t^^p
•y — y — y
i ». h s k is s . i Chorus.
i
Is
-te
-j-^i
Je
Je
^
«~T
J^J
-*-*-:
;
t
-0-^-9—0 — 0-
save,
giv'n, And Je-sus can save e-ven me.
heir To kingdoms and mansions above,
Yes,
Yes,
sus ismigh-ty to
sus is mighty, etc.
is migh • ty to save,
And all his sal- va-tion may
rrrr
know, On his bo - som I lean, And his blood makes me clean, For his blood can wash whiter than snow,
va - tion may know, /7\
m
WW
-£-^
v—v,
W=f=W^
?=p:
fcr
J
s
V 1? ^
fr— g-
p— ^-
sp
>
3. Ob, the rapturous heights of his love,
The measureless depths of his grace,
My soul all his fulness would prove,
And live in his loving embrace. — Chortis,
4. In him all my wants are supplied,
His love makes my heaven below,
And freely his love is applied,
His blood that makes whiter than snow. — Cliorus.
Words by Rev. I. Baltzell
j,
fe=£i
-f»v-
'TWILL BE SWEET WHEN WE MEET.
NAl^E-JJ
ilusic by Rey. J. P. Smith.
41
=fc
^
il
=5^=
3^3
j j #'
*
,+ft
1. There's a place where my lovsd once are gone,
P
bS
# •*•
Who have labored and suffered with me ;
JB. JL. JL JL JL JL 44 A
•4r— ^^
£
5
£
Now ex - alt - ed with
Sh mm
V U H U U I
Chorus.
V— t^-
£— V-
^
fc±
fcfc
i
i
-i
^
#
a— p
&
Christ on his throne, the Redeem -er and Saviour they see. 'Twill be sweet, when we meet, When we
when we meet, when we meet,
V*
m
tL +
m—t
lai
H 1-
0 £
V — &-W-
±
*=£
«--£—£
m—m
i^— V-
i
i
s — d
*=*=*:
1/
y
1 fcr-fc
■v-v-
&±-
V V \
* *.x± *
meet on that beauti - ful shore, 'Twill be sweet, when we meet, When we meet on that beauti - ful shore
'Twill be sweet, when we meet, when we meet,
\ IF¥ |»=I=E
v— 1/
v— ^.
t
-) — 1-
I
2 There's a place where the bright angels dwell
In a pure and a peaceful abode:
O the joys of that home none can tell,
But we know 'tis the palace of God.— CItorus.
V *
0 — 0 — 0-
t=t
, .
<?•
3 There's a place where the weary shall live,
When the sorrows of life are all oVr ;
'Tis a home which the Saviour will give,
'Tis a home where we'll sorrow no more. — Choruu
42
P
For a Funeral.
i
DEAD AND GONE.
/T\
-&T
t
1. Gone !
2. Gone!
t
22:
_l
Words and Music by Rev. I. Baltzell
i5r-
~Z?
*t#
i-T-^-^V-^-
fs-*T
— -1^-
£:
gone! dead and gone ! To the home of joy on high ; The battle's fought and won ; Lay thy
gone ! dead and gone ! Thou hast gained the blissful shore ; When sorrow's night is done, We will
IS
/7\
m
%=&-
-?£-&
t-¥=t
-0-
^
-0—0
-0—0-
V?
EEE=£t
P
-0\-W-
0'-0-
r~i
'V— v-
&
m
V
v J
faith - ful ar - mor by. Faithful ser - vant, fare thee well ; Thou the hap - py number swell, Where no
meet to part no more. Faithful ser - vant, fare thee well ; Here our hearts with sadness swell ; Eut we
A
.0 •
#.?.
y-
v — ?
^9-
-»-
^
V;
&-
-»-
£^-fr
-iSL
y i>
r — tr-^
ft*-
-#-t— »-
i?.
m
£
£
^:
—i — t-^-i — i — I —
part - ing tear is shed, Where no heart has ev- er bled,
know 'tis Je - sus' will. He can all our sorrow's heal.
9:
\
?
t/-v
£
I
y-y-
■&-
9-
i
3.
Gone I gone! dead and gone!
From the home of toil and pain ;
But in yon blissful home,
Faithful one, we'll meet again.
Faithful servant, fare thee well,
With the holy thou dost dwell;
Thou art free from toil and pain s
Fare thee well, we'll meet again.
THE JOYOUS MORNING.
48
Worda and Music fcy J. H. Kuezenknabe.
IS IS
3^t
J— ND S
1
-#--■
J
f^-N
m
1. Christian see the joyous morning Calls us to this ho - ly place, Come, with love ana faith adorn - ing, Humhly
2. Ev' - ry Christian heart re- joic-es, Joyous anthems till the air, Smiling natures cheer the voices In the
^ I h ^ fc
3~^'^
t
»^-#-
I fc-frlf-C E PI
"PITT
N— &
-*-■•--*-
T
Chorus.
• P
*-±-W—v-
gTf-
-t^— t^— ^
# -: -
#-•-#
fe
is^Ese
atr
-tzt
-*-*£
3=*^
I
dtt
i
-^
# -*-
* -*-
u
v y\ i
f;
■#— *-
Z25C
-*— g-j-f
r
R
r
v v i r ' y y
to the throne of grace. 1 Bells are ringing, Children singing, Chris - tian men and women come, To the Lord their
sacred house of prayer, j Bells are ringing, Children singing, Christian men and women come, To the Lord their
IS
m
^— M-p*:
r-F
R
V— V— V-
fe±
>
r
-r*H«-
V*T
r^w
S:
J
-^-
tnr-r
■y-
t=£=t
^
£
1 — r
^
t
-?—*-
m
of - f 'ring bringing, In
off'ring bringing, In this Sabbath
r
this Sabbath home,
home.
■p-trr
£
«— €
J*- *-
*=*=*:
^-=£=t
-«-
E
3 See the Lord, the King of glory,
Blesses with a bounteous hand,
While we read in sacred story,
Tidings of Inimanuel's hand. — Chorus.
Angel bands are drawing nearer,
Breathing peace, good will again ;
Christ more precious, heaven dearer,
Than of old on Bethl'eois plain. — Cliorui.
44
j Spirited
eo/y/fl //OAff.
Words and Music by W. M. Weekley.
PC
E^
1. I long to hear the Saviour say. Ye wea- ry ones, come home, En -joy the rest of end - less day, Where
# , p f f * it ' t" f .» rf" f" f" f i ^ • *
#— P-
«
» # i»
Ha-4
**-#-
£
*
-# — »-
Chorus.
t=lF=t=iw$
££
i_#.
ra
^-2-
^— ^
I
^ f
-=-#-
U 1/
toil can nev - er come. We are go - - ing home, We are go ing
go - ing home, We are go - ing home, go - ing home, We are
r~T7
home, For the Sa viour is
go - ing home, hies - sed Sa • viour is
we'll he gone.
very soon
^
Ziz
X-
£±f-
■Vr
p=p — k— fc==k
1 — [ — E^=£
i
#— P-P-H*
ff
g^:
S_»
"tJf"
3 Come, sinners, leave a world of care,
And journey with us, too ;
Come, live in mansions bright and fair,
A home prepared for you. — Clio.
A
V
2 A land of rest, the saints' delight,
The Christian's home on high,
Where glory shines forever bright,
And Christ is always nigh. — Cho.
NOW IS THE TIME.
From "Children's Friend."
45
Music hy Eev. A. A- Gbai.fv.
3=?
-i v ■ 1 dWJ+J-g
SWA%---«^^
9^!ife
2^1
i_#— * 2=*^
V- V-
■v-17 —
^— ^
*:
-V-N-
-*— #
X3=E
v=5=
\
Chorus.
— s^lr^^
-u-
#—#—#-
■v-v-
f=ft
? t*
gii^piil^
Nowisthetime; Believe il, dear children, that now is the time.
Put should you he spared e en to Jtea^rewdteB,
Each year full of sorrow and shame wiU hay been,
Vnd v, v.,, gained by trm guilty delay!
- inclined to believe and obey.— Cno.
Th< ii now is the time to Becure the "good pari,"
Thai sanctifies while it rejoices the heart;
'.The day of acceptance is passing away ;
Then haste to the Saviour, dear children, to-day.— «•.
U >
46
"Words by Rev. I. Bai/tzell.
i
PRECIOUS JESUS.
I
±=4
Arranged for this work.
^
£
22
23=3=
^
3t
1. Pre - cious Je - sus, am com
2. Pre - cious Je - sus, I am long
• -*- -o- -o-
ing, Com
ing.
All
ing to the cross to - day ;
thy peace and joy to know ;
*±=%.
j&L
P3
■v
122
22-
v-
?z=
£
*
J
^
'3 *.- a.
4--..
^
22
I am trust - ing, I'm
Wilt thou grant those pur
be
er
liev
bless
£
Nf^^T
ing, Take, oh, take my sins
ings, All the world can ne'er
a
be
way.
stow.
t±=t
£=£
m
£E£
¥
W-±-
>
J<
I
Chorus.
v-
j
i
u
A
^t
22
5t
22
22
3i
"N
-S'
Pre - cious Je - sus, come and make me whole,
19- -&• -&- _#■ f-_
£
-&L
r^
221
^
£
^r
Ho
-3*-
-^
-*-
ly Spir - it, sanc-ti-fy my soul.
zzatzz
f-
M^si
3. Precious Jesus, I am clinging
To the cross on which thou died ;
Help me, Saviour, help me quickly,
Speak, and I am sanctified. — Chorus.
2£t:
fci
4. Precious Jesus, I am trusting,
Trusting in the crimson tide;
Hallelujah, precious Jesus!
Now I feel thy blood applied. — Chorus,
THE GOLDEN PLAIN.
Arranged from " Christian Harp."
47
mm^m
e
g-*
i.
f Thi
I Where
in 's a land of li^M and love far away. Where the long-severed friends meet again;} w, ., , . . ,.
re the long dark night, and toil-wearing day, Never tarnish the bright golden plain, j w nere tne ruae winter Dlast
never
u ±v£ ££ t t t t,
'=r=n
chills with its breath, Nor the darkling storm glooms the sky, Where the soul is free from sorrow and death, And the tear never more
dims the eye.
=11 — : — U-E Mil U-P I 1 I U-ff±trrfczff±=fcff±teil±
r
2.
To that golden shore some dear ones have gone,
And we trust we shall meet them again,
When that glorious morn, in lustre shall dawn,
And we stand on the bright golden plain;
By the river of life, in the city of light,
We shall roam with loved ones above ;
And with angels bright, thro' time's ceaseless flight,
We will sing of a dear Saviour's love.
3.
Come, ye weary wand rers, come, come away,
To the home of the loved gone before ;
Give your heart to Christ, no longer delay,
Let us meet on the bright golden shore;
Then we'll sing hallelujah to God and the Lamb,
Who has saved us from sorrow and pain ;
Yes, we'll sing hallelujah to God and the Lamb,
When we meet on the bright golden plain.
48
Chanting style.
BESIDE THE CROSS.
Jfusic by Rev. L Baltzeix.
1. Jews were wrought to cruel madness, Christians fled in fear and sadness ;
2. At its foot her feet she planted, By the dreadful scene undaunted,
#-• *-*.*-*.*. ££: •#-•#. #. JL .£. .0. A 4L
ry stood the cross be [ -
Ma
Till the gen - tie sufl'
'rer
side.
died.
Hal - le-lu-jah, Hal - le-lu-jah,
men.
^*—i~-%
§See£££e1
• #. f- #.
■**•.
^^— i/-
-«?-
^
5. And when, under sore temptation,
Goodness suffers like transgression,
Christ again is crucified.
Hallelujah, etc.
±=±
&-
1
3. Poets oft have sung her story,
Painters decked her brow with glory,
Priests her name have deified.
Hallelujah, etc.
4. But no worship, song or glory
Touches like that simple story,
Mary stood the cross beside.
Hallelujah, etc.
6. But if love be there, true-hearted,
By no grief or terror parted,
Mary stands the cross beside.
Hallelujah, etc.
CROWN HIM LORD OF ALL.
Arranged for this work.
m
t*
Spirited.
$
0 M
*=5Si
All
hail
— i — .
— y-
the pow'r
of
Je
f
J-
sus'
name,
f*
Let
5
an - - -
£
gels
Let
f
pros - trate
an - gels
1
U
CROWN HIM LORD OF ALL.-Conctuded.
-&
-&
5
t
=±
3fct
Let
Let an - gels pros - trsite
an - - - gels pros - trate fall. Bring
fall, let an • gels pn s - trate fall,
ie roy
al
-M-
w=W-
f
-4-
ir-4*
t
V *
-£-
*crp
di - a dein, And crown him Lord of all, And crown him Lore
-t
*--.
t
dem, And crown him Lord of all, Andcrownhim Lord of all, And crown him,
And crown him Lord of all, And crown him Lord of all, crown him
mj^
r
£
v— y— y— y-
fc
i^^M
i=
!» h
Ffm
^=p
y v
3=t--
p^g
3EE
»y-t-
crown him, crown him Lord of all, Andcrownhim, crownhim, crown him Lord of all.
crown him, crown him, crown him, crown him,
*— T— -r»— r-# » — ■— — 1 -P-t-^ I 0
KJ
V— v-v
tf:
v— y-^j— v —
2. Ye chosen seed of Israel's race,
A remnant weak and small,
Hail him who saves you by his grace,
And crown him Lord of all.
S. Ye Gentile sinners, ne'er forget
The wormwood and the gall ;
Go. spread you trophies at his feet.
And crown him Lord of all.
t-
»
i
t=t
*=£
=£=£
&^=^
b — v-
4. Let every kindred, every tribe,
On this terrestrial ball,
To him all majesty ascribe,
And crown him Lord of all.
5. O, that with yonder sacred throng.
We at his feet may fall !
We'll join the everlasting song,
And crown him Lord of all.
f=
F
50
By permission.
I M E
I U U R U n i I U IV .
O C/-/J L.
T. C. O'KANE.
p&
Some build their hopes on
0 • » <^J^ 0 ~f~
the ev - er shift-ing sand, Some on their fame, or their treasure,
or Tftheir land.
^ 0 P 0—^0 0-f ■
v-
;=£=£
fc
^ — ^ — 1^_
-#
-:fe
-i
-0-
v=i§-
-£-
:=rE-a
i
p
9-:?:
Mine's
±-
-0-
Pt
H
on
it
L
-4-.—
a Rook
fczfc
3f
£
-p*"*-
that
for
ev
v-
-<*:
#
~3t
er
-£
2. That Rook's a Cross, its arms outspread,
Celestial priory bailies its bead;
To its firm base my all I briny;,
And to the Cross of Ages oling.
Some build their hopes, etc.
-0 ^
+
will
r
stand,
Je
ifSZT-r
t*-,—
-P-
E
-0
=t
-=1 — «-
0—S-
sus, the " Rook
-0T
of
=F
:si:
A
•I
-/S?-
I—
■ZT
ges.
i
-»-
3. That Rock's a Tower, whose lofty height,
Illumed with Heaven's unclouded light,
Opes wide its gate beneath the dome.
Where saints Hnd rest with Christ at home.
Some build their hopes, etc.
WE'LL MEET THEM AGAIN.
51
Music by Rev. I. Baltzeli,.
1. Ma- ny dear children have liv'd and died, And whisper'd good-bye at the riv - er side ; They dipp'd their feet in the
2. Ma- ny dear children we know do stand. Ani fin-ger their harps in the bet - ter land ; Their little hands from each
3. They used to mourn when the children died, Before the kind Sav-iour was cru - ci - fied, The cross with radiant un-
t
W
9
v-
S^
-F
-N-
sliin-ing stream, And fa-ded a - way like a love - ly dream. And faded a- way like a love - ly dream.
Gold-en string, Makes mel-o-dy sweet, while the an - gels sing, Makes melo - dy sweet, while the an - gels sing,
changing beam, Now lights all the way o'er the mist- y stream, Now lights all the way o'er the mist- y stream.
Shall we meet them
^
te-
a - gain? Yes, we'll meet them again on the shore, .
yes, we'll meet them again on the
:wz^z*:
v-
:t
fr-yr
E
on the shore.
b-r^z h 0-
tz
^~-
r=z:
■0-
-I —
t:
V
m
I
=F
V
■-?--
. N- N
tr
# #-t -0-
-l
4-
0—0 ±-0
-\—
¥
-j—>—^=q_^__N i=7=i=
shore . . . . They have gone to that beau - ti - ful home But we'll meet them a - gain on the shore.
on Ibe shore, on the shore.
^
£qg=j
t"t--r
r-tn?-i
v-
:£
¥
-» 0—0
53
SAILING O'ER THE SEA.
Con spirito.
^— ^—^-
-*-J— -£--*
> Cow spirito. . i^_ — p. p. — p, £ — \ dr- i'
\J Zl - _ .. . xl-~ J 1„ lnn^ • With H
-±=X-
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
-I K— ft-—
=#
-#=-
■5
4- — f\-
I
-*-•
~* ~*~ "^ " . iv ^wion^wmm swell-ing sail we on-ward sweep ; "I
haP-py Pilgrim ba.d.Sa.l-.ng to ^r^/twiwhowm^eS! sail - or o'er the deep. \
.wSrel hap-py, .W.B. £&&£££& WW aide -or o'er
Tho'the tempest ran -es long Then ,JS One among tnew ™ « Tho, the |reakeI8 „,„ „p - on tl.e lea,)
^ a — — a ■= 1 \ i ^ r~
'Mid the strife hispTaisewuiBY,«n, ^ ^ ,- — ^ ^ -
ing, o'er the sea,
AVe are sail -
We are
iiig o'er the sea, .
We are sail - - ing, o'er the sea . . . . »« ■« =>-" " m „•«, the sea, We are
We are sailing, sailing, sailing, sailing. sail,ngoCTthe^». _We _a« ^»^4_ ^~ ££j 2l & Z^^ *-*- m
-rlP-V i»' P 9
: c rTi r
tztzT-M — i^p
lg, -nmg^^g. j£ ~ _^ ^_^ ^_9t _+£; + -gj T^f^^^m.
vn fi i m
:^^E^E^E^^^4^±H
frtt e
Wflaredrift - - - ing t'ward the lea
drift - - " ing t'ward the lea, . . . .. . We are ami. ng> a^g, drift-ing, driftingt'ward the lea.
drift-ing, drift-ing, drift-ing, drift-ing, TOing *«**« jlp, ^ are dnft^, TOM , I £ ^ - _^_^
=£ -t-. it- -F jfc S^JE=t^d-Xl— M-
fFfrcT^
•£7 2: ~ZJ Z- "T- zl -P- -P-' -P- -h r -H- ■+- ■+- +ZJ5Z. T~ il i r — r-
THE LIVING JESUS.
53
i
_y-
*=i
N— i
-K
^m
*nr
*=*
-+^*-J
1. Je - sus for - ev - er lives, Praise we his name ; His blood sal - va - tion gives, His love proclaim.
95
■4-?-
^
?=A
^
0 '•:
f
^
£
Chorus.
ft
b
IN
^
3^
1
122:
* — # — s — -+T1-* — *
^
i=^
Je - sus for - ev - er lives, Ev - er lives, ev - er lives, Je - sus for - ev - er lives, Praise we his name.
=P^2=
I
^
$
r?
^
\ I V • V V I
2. Jesus forever reigns,
Crown we our King ;
His glory wakes the strains
Saints, angels sing.
Jesus forever reigns, etc.
V f " v
3. Jesus forever loves ;
Precious his grace;
Those whom he once approves,
Live to his praise.
Jesus forever loves, etc.
Jesus forever saves
Those whom he loves ;
O'er sorrow's wildest waves
His power he proves.
Jesus forever saves, etc.
3. Though for many ages past
She has braved the stormy blast,
She's the old ship Zion as of yore ;
Safe amid the rocks and shoals
She has landed many souls,
Safe at home, on Canaan's*happy shore.
We are sailing, etc.
Concluded from opposite page.
4. Ho ! ye sinners, hear to-day,
There is danger in your way !
By the chart of folly you're misled;
There is danger underneath,
And above a storm of wrath,
And the rocks of destruction are ahead.
We are sailing, etc.
64
Words arranged.
dbte
9-'?-
— f
-#-
-0-
CHILDREN, COME HOME,
Music by Her. I. Baxtzeli*
S=J=
_r_t_A__£-glV_[
p
1. Hark, those bell-tones sweetly pealing, " Children, come home." Far and wide melodious stealing," Children, oome home,"
2. Hark, the bell to prayer is culling, "Children, come home." See his saints before him falling; " Children,come home."
-# . J' 0"t Ti.P — f — m— T-(g ,,r „ r f , T-:— J p" t>-
MrS-
£
-fr— b>— ^-
*
feES
e
U U1 u
££Bii
fcfcl:
f
■»■
f
W— V— ^
IX— v-+
\
« € — « J !__# — # — 3-LJ- • — # — € L#_±_ # — 0 — ^J i_^ — * — *
*^
Effi
-r-
— I — «-
Thro' each heart the voice is thrilling, Storms of grief and passion stilling; All the land with voices filling," Children,come
There's a mansion far a- bove thee, Where dwell spirits pure and lovely; Listen, how they sweetly call thee,"Children,come
^
9
-*-—*-
£
h«— *_«.
#-=-
£
£
m — S- Hs-.-- s — * — L- H — H — ' — ' — r
r — P — r r F — f — i y-t^-y — I — t — b
££
A
42;
-#_! 0
V V 9
t=H=tt
*-*-
1 V~V~V
V-V-U
v-v-
PF
j^^^4^E^fe^
s
3
^J-
■s*-.
E
home."
home."
All the land with voic-es fill- ing, "Children, come home."
Lis- ten, how they sweetly call thee, "Children, come home."
-3L
*
■£=*=£
W^— '*-— F— F-
-h — h — hr
t://t.f
-g—g— g
£
T
ps
3 Still the echoed voice is ringing,
"Children, come home,"
Every heart pure incense bringing,
" Children, come home."
Saviour, round thy altar bending,
May our souls, to heav'n ascending,
Find with thee a home ne'er ending.
When we get home.
"Words b j E. Johnson.
THE ROCK THAT IS HIGHER.
=+
L^> : -#-L
-^
-\ P
y-&-r
W. G. Fischer.
55
u^-
=Fi=^s=S
1 J j» jTJT
9feE3
1. Oh, sometimes the shadows are deep, And rough seems the path to the goal, And sorrows, sometimes how they sweep
Like tempests down over the soul. 0, then to the Rock let me fly, To the Rock that is high-er than
let me fly,
-J
• V
high - er than I,
f V
O, then to the Rock let me fly,
♦ ♦ £ h
let me fly,
To the Rock that is higher than I.
9:
Eg
-V-V— ^
H 1-
^zz^
2. Oh, sometimes how long seems the day,
And sometimes how weary my feet;
But toiling in life's 'lusty way,
The Rock's blessed -hadow how sweet 1
O, then to the Rock let me fly,
To the Rock that is higher than L
F
F
■*— »-
■p=w=r-=p
J
-br-V-
3. O, near to the Rock let me keep,
Or blessings, or sorrows prevail ;
Or climbing the mountain way steep,
Or walking the shadowy vale,
Then quick to the Rock can I fly.
To the Rock that is higher than I.
V— V-
■&-*-
EfEI
r
56
+ csT at unur
■■*.■«.= .- *T * »r •*• «-w »•
SfpirUttL
S7\
Arran**d for this Wart
pmsmummtutettimii i ; m
1. When, faint and weary toil - ing, The sweat drops on my brow. I long to rest from labor, To diop the burden now.
There comes a gen-tle chiding, To quell such mourning sigh ; Work while the sun is shining, There's resting by-and-by .
/T\
^BE
tttfrtttmtt-ffiHHt
/V\
OT& C C I I ESS g J B B g EE 3
P P p u
Chorus.
I
^=*
&&=mmti^uittrf e-h-t^
*
*
Oh, there's rest, there's rest at home ; And the Saviour bids me come, To sing and shout forever, There's rest, there's rest at
b L L L L r =*= I L . L L
£
£
i
I:
fel
aaw-te-Tf#N i a I juii
*
i
#
home. Home, home, sweet, sweet home, There's rest • ing at
OL
B ?: i-ff
m
VL
1 B
home. There's rest - ing at home.
EI
I
at
=6
CHILDREN OF THE OLVEN TIME.
fefgE
■h — & — h-
i
i
U
^£
Arranged
3=t
57
S
f Children of
| We thy presence
^1
the olden time Hailed thee Lord and Saviour :"(,,•■.. „ „ , . „ _„_„». ,•*>„ ™
ience fain would prove By our wholebehaviour! j Marchin* on' march - ing on, march - ing on,
|ifgB
E
my home in heaven.
4 A 4 * ..
2. Children of the olden time,
Passed through sin and sorrow,
Looking on, and upward still
To a bright to-morrow. — Cho.
V
?=£
n
E=F
3. Children of the olden time,
Earth was not their dwelling;
£ We would gain that blissful home,
Where their songs are swelling.
Cho.
. Children of the olden time,
Now are high in glory ;
Lord, to reach that happy land,
Help each child before thee. — Cho.
Children of the olden time,
Had their sins forgiven;
Save us Lord, and in thy time,
Bring us safe to heaven. — Cho.
Concluded from opposite page.
2. This life to toil is given,
And he improves it best
Who seeks by patient labor
To enter into rest ;
Then, pilgrim, worn and weary,
Press on, the goal is nigh :
The prize is just before thee,
There's resting by and by. — Chorus.
3. Nor ask, when overburdened,
You long for friendly aid :
"Why stands my brother idle?
No yoke upon him laid V*
The master bids him tarry,
And dare you ask Him why?
Go, labor in my vineyard ;
There's resting by and by. — Chorus.
4. Weak reaper in the harvest,
Let this thy strength sustain ;
Each sheaf within the garner
Brings you eternal gain;
Then bear the cross with patience,
To fields of duty hie ;
'Tis sweet to work for Jesus ;
There's resting by and by.— Chorus.
Words by I. Baltzell.
OVER THERE,
Arranged for this Work.
J. N
V V
2 The glorified saints are at home over there,
They once Buffered and toiled here below j
Exalted to heaven, its glories they share,
Sin, nor sorrow, nor death ever know.
'Tis a beautiful home, &c.
8 They've £ me to that home of delight over there,
Where the city is glorious and bright,
And crowns of the victor in triumph they wear.
And the <Jo4 of th«' just is its light.
'Tis a beautiful home, &c
V V
4 In that happy home of delight over there,
Are the martyrs and prophets of old ;
And our loved ones there are all radiant and bright,
Both the throne and the Lamb now behold.
'Tis a beautiful home, &c.
5 I long to he gone to that home over there,
To rejoice with the saints evermore;
And v, hen I am saved in that home over there,
I will meet them to part nevermore.
Mis a beautiful home, &c
Words by ReT. I. Baltzell.
SHALL WE MEET?
Arranged for this Work.
K
59
~H —
t
1. When this fit - ful life is
2. Shall we meet the faithful
o - ver, When we're free from toil and care, Shall we
pilgrims Who with us are toil - iug here? When our
meet no more to
pil - grim - age is
sev - er,
end- ed
Shall we meet each other there?
Shall we meet each other there?
Shall we meet be - yond the riv - er,
Where the
s—A * a
^^m=t
fields arc bright and fair?
Shall we meet no more to sev - er,
:«=*:
Shall we meet each oth- er there?
it
tp:
Shall we meet our loved and lost ones,
Whom we loved with love most rare?
When we reach the golden city,
Shall we meet each other there?
Shall we meet, &c.
Shall we meet our blessed Saviour,
In that far-off home so fair?
Shall we sing his praise for ever?
Shall we meet each other there?
Shall we meet, <&c.
Yes, we'll meet again in glory,
When we're free from toil and care;
If we live and die in Jesus,
We shall meet each other there.
We shall meet, «tc.
60
Spirited.
BEAR THE GROSS.
I
i
23
j—
-<s-
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
4=2
tr^^r*
t=t=i
0 0
£
-tf?—
I #
J=+z?i?
*=»*
1. Ye val-iant sol - diers of the cross, Ye happy pilgrim band, Though in this world you suffer loss, Press
-0- -0- ■#- -#-
g
rfcc
-fs is
-P— P
P — » \
. 0 '
-*—J£
»->->-V
—i-
■#— P-
:fct
i — r— p-r— ^r-FF-r
i^
^
1-^4-
gfr--
r
Chorus.
1— r
l l l I
^ * •—*-
I I i i
£3
*— •-
^
A— N
--N--
T
A— k-
^=— 0 — 0-
N N
s^
*-«-*:
=r-
e7 • V V V V ' V V
on to Canaan's land. Bear the cross .... bear the cross, . . . For we've all got the cross to
Let us nev - er mind the scoffs or the frowns of the world,
ft g . g: g g- g *£ "g": "g" . f" T'TT f* f" ,f " *
^N
*
-l I _
-(21.
42^-
T
:t=t
rg r rg
-(53-
^
-A— N-
*^-#
"r^-rrr-"
l*7 /
bear, Bear the cross, . . - . bear the cross, . . . And you'll have the crown to wear.
It will near-ly make the crown all the* hright-er to shine, When wchave the crown to wear.
■8 t*r.
^mz
■l±
=£
i
g: r- ir -*yg
i
1
^R
p=t
H
w-*-
£****=£*
V— &-
f
.-£2__!1
CHILDREN /NVi7ED.
Words and Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
61
1. Oh, come,lit-tle children, your Saviour is calling, Oh, come, in the morning of vig-or and youth,
Oh, come, while his blessings around you are falling, Oh, come, little ones, to the fountain of truth,
ymm^^
Chorus.
j.
mm
mki
Oh, come, to the Saviour, Come, ask his kind fa-vor, And o - ver the riv- er you'll live ev-er- more.
-#- -9- -+- -0- -#--#-"-#- ^ [N
zsizf
V V
*—*-
M-p-
V — '*-
-t—l-
A—t-
*—?-
2. Oh, children, your Saviour is pleading in glory,
< )h, hear him, obey him, your days may be few ;
Oh, hear him repeating the ever-blest story,
"Oh, come to me, children, I'm your Saviour too."
Chorus. — Oh, come to the Saviour, etc.
V-
®e£
M—U— -4 ^ — U
t
V
Then come to the S- .dour, don't wait for the morrow;
How many have waited and saw not the day;
And now in the regions of darkness and sorrow
They sadly remember 'twas only delay.
Chorus. — Oh, come to the Saviour, etc.
Concluded from opposite page.
2. Your Jesus once, " without the camp,"
Bought liberty for you ;
Then bravely fight for truth and right,
And keep your crown in view.
3. Our bugle ne'er shall sound retreat
While Jesus leads us on ;
We will not lay our weapons by
Until we wear the crown.
Your weary feet shall walk the street
All paved with gold, on high ;
And he who wore the crown of thorns,
Will crown you in the sky.
63
DON'T YOU HEAR THEM,
Duef.
i
h
4s ^, Bs-
£
=P
From Heavenly Echoes, by permiwAtfii.
£
i-_{-_^r~l
# 0 0 0— -0
-PN
+
1. Ho - ly an - gels in their flight, Traverse o - ver earth and sky, Acts of kindness their delight, Winged wtati
2. Tho' their forms we can - not see, They attend and guide our way, Till we join their coin-pa - ny, In the
Semi-chorus for Girls.
J:
<U*
mm
m.
\
**
\) ^ v v -*-*-*■■*
mercy as they fly. Don't you hear them? coming o-ver hill and plain,
realms of endless day. Don't you hear them ? &c
#5
-*--
Scatt'riug music in their heavenly train !
?=fi
$=tk
•—?
ttP*3l
F
-0-
<—0-±-Sf-
v—v-z-
fzzS
y~* —
F=F
-*-
A i
"f Full Chorus.
.-a).
*=;
S£?
-0-
-0-
^■r—h — V
i p. — p_
v-
i
■#— *"
*
-<S<-
r
-H # # #-
-# 0 0 0-
-0 — F
=F*=i=p:
/T\
O, don't you hear the an - gels com - ing, Singing as they come ! O, bear me angels, angels bear me home.
4 —
-p— y-
3a:
&
E
Lu J LJ J 1 ■ I
V V V V
\
3. Had we but an angel's wing,
And an angel's heart of name,
Oh, how sweetly would we ring,
Thro' the world, the Saviour's name.
Cho.— Don't you hear, <&c
, Yet methinks if I should die,
And become an angel, too,
I, perhaps, like them might fly
And the Saviour's bidding do.
Cho.— Don't your hear, do.
WILDREN'S HOSANNJL 63
tVoras and Music by Ktjrzenknabe.
For Concert effect, let the Hosanna be sung by Infant iHpariment, in another room.
pEI
2
1=4-
1. Infant voic - es sweetly sing-ing, Hosan - na to the Lord,
2. Je - sus loves the children so, Hosan - na to the Lord,
3. They pro - claim in glad re - frain, Hosan - C3 to the Lord,
Prais - es to the heav'nly King, Ho-
"When to sa - cred courts they go, Ho-
Songs of hon - or to his name, Ho-
san - na
san - na
san - na
to
to
to
m^
the Lord ;
the Lord ;
the Lord;
-L-X
List the strain, Hosan - na, Sound again, Hosan - na,
There we hear Hosan - na, Sweet and clear, Hosan - na,
Je - sus lives, Hosan - na, He receives Hosan - na,
(;io
An -
Hon
ry be to
gel bands are
• or, praise, and
*
■&-!—* , L — 1 1 1 ft- -0-±— » — # 0- - 0 £>_*
»-' — # # #- - 0 1!
1 — r-
/T\ rrs
«N l r.
/CVTN
-<9
=J=^
**
i
vic - to
§•
i
God on high, "Waft the cho - rus to the sky, Hosan -na
hov'ring near, Whisp'riug to the infant ear, Hosan - na
ry, To the Son of David be, Hosan -na
-P-T*
f=f
10-
4v*
to the Lord.
to the Lord.
to the Lord.
4-g» — 0 — 0 1
HI
When we've done with mortal praise,
Hosanna to the Lord,
One glad shout of victory raise,
Hosanna to the Lord;
Then we'll hear, Hosanna,
Far and near, Hosanna,
Heavenly hallelujahs rise,
Glory fills th' eternal skies,
Hosanna to the Lord.
v> s^
64
i
*~
r«f SWEETEST NAME.
4-
Music by Rev. I. BaltzelL.
i
— f
J
-<»-
s^
i
±
*^-
Nt
1. Come, let us search God's ho - ly word, And see what we can find A -bout that lov - ing, gra-cious Lord, The
2. See there, how hum -ble was his birth, No bed but straw or hay ; Though he was Lord of all the earth, He
3. He healed the sick, and raised the dead, The deaf and blind he cured ; At his command the dev - ils fled, The
iEl
+
*23?±S
1 — SrT
F^P
t
£=Z
*^
A
1
^
I
t=+=i
Chorus.
■sk
isU
J2£
:t
-+-
-*-. — d— ¥■
-0- — * — F-
-<s^
g
sweet the name of Christ to me,
Sa - viour of mankind. How sweet
in a man - ger lay.
sea o - beyed his word. sweet the name of Christ to me, How sweet the name of Christ to me.
— #—
We'll
*• */J
*=&
&
EF^T
rTTTTTrf^
t
r
i
"N
W^s
J=£
sr\
2
— (-
3—
s
shout and sing for Christ our King, Who died on Cal
^ + ^ + + a ..• j£.
=f=f
T— tr
P?
va - ry.
£
^
f=
1
4. And when he was by sinner's hands,
Scourged, crucified, and slain,
He brake asunder all their bands,
And rose to life again. — Chorus.
5. Who would not love a Lord so kind.
Or fear a God so great?
Whoever waits on him will find
"lis not in vain to wait. — Chcnu,
THEY ARE WAITING.
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
65
mm
^
M
1.
2.
2=^
l^rM
±t
1
5=*
T^-
7
P^H
-•-r
5=
-. f Oh, the lov'd ones wait our com - ing, On yon hap - py, peaceful shore ; ]
"{ Wait to bid us all a wel - come, When the [Omit ] J day of life
is
o er.
m
^
-&ji<
St
£
i&i
j Chorus.
fc=!v
*
iSt
A
fe
^S
fe
3
~Gh
t=±
i—*
n
^=
V V V i> '\J l>
They are wait - ing at
wait-ing for our eoni-iug,
p p P P ^—0-^~--
[> U b b u 1/
3
t5>-
# *— #-
the mar - gin, They are wait - ing on thcshore; They are
wait-ing, they are waiting,
f ff'f'f'f'f'f'^'f'
-^
^S
y
5
f
=£:
b:
^— ^ U 1^ '>-
*
L— E-'-i &-' I ■-
ZZ£
r\
£
^
t=t==£
£=£
i
1 ""
our com - ing, All
the lov'd ones gone be - fore,
lov'd ones, all the lov'd ones,
t^Jt t r f ^ f 1*
£
U L>
y
wait - ing for
wait-ing, they are wait-ing
9:
^tES
-y-
^
-it
S
£
*=#
2. See them stand beside the river,
With the bright, angelic band;
See them waving us a welcome,
In the breezes on the strand. — Cho.
31
F
How they beckon us to join them,
On the everlasting shore;
Oh, my spirit longs to greet them, [Cho.
Where we'll meet to £art no more. —
4. Soon we'll cross the rolling river,
Soon we'll reach t lie golden shore;
Soon we'll share a home in glory,
With the lov'd ones gone before. — Cho.
66
J 1L ft Withenergy,
OVER THE RIVER.
a vvun energy, k w ^ ^)^^^^l
W9rds and Music by Rev. I. Bai/tzEIL.
-*H*
N N |y N N K
0 — #
5=5:
-# 4 0 0 0 4
-0 — * — 0 — 0 — * — 0-
1.0- ver the riv - er, the rlv - er of time, Lies the bright land, of a verdure sublime, Val-leys of beauty in
2. O - ver the riv - er time never grows old ; There are enjoyments and pleasures untold ; There is a ci „y with
3. O - ver the riv - er our sorrows will cease, Hush'd by the songs of a heavenly peace ; When we get there what a
fife (t m ~s b m
-r-r-f-r
fi=t£
^fl-i
m
£
v v v
V—/—V-
-fs- IS h
-0— 0-
-7*=^
£££
=fc
U— V— V— V
V—+-*
W-V
.4
i
§*=£
Chorus.
?=?
£
i=±
-0-
i
PPpf
$
splen-dor do shine;
streets of pure gold ;
hap - py re - lease !
v — v-
Beau - ti
Beau - ti
Beau - ti
ful, beau - ti - ful home !
ful, beau - ti - ful home !
ful, beau - ti - ful home !
-f F i F-
i> v u y
O - ver the riv - er, The
O - ver the beau - ti - ful riv - er, The
1/ U 1/
beau - ti - ful
beau-ti - ful, beau-ti - ful
riv - cr,
riv - er,
V
O - ver the riv - er, Tbe fields are all green.
O - ver the beau-ti - ful riv - er, The beaut i-ful fields are all green.
t±
r r h i r
£.
F^w
v ^ g
V— w-
HH
y y
1
I
Words by Rev. W. H. Burrell.
Moderato. >.
^km
OH,
I
THE REST
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
07
1 1 i ^ g~m"T
*
gee
q:
1. My grate - ful beart shall bless the Lord,
2. I've i'ound at last my E - den home ;
=4:
J
— i — h
%-
His wondrous love
A - mid its joys
-0-
r
-#-
r
— 0-
pro - claim; He leads me by his
I rest; My wand'ring feet no
tr
*
r«
■?=5=t-
r — r
m
-&
&-
J-
t
-0—
S^f
&
J
i 0 »<
*
Chorus.
±
-0-
ra - cious word, Where sweet e - mo - tions
bng-er roam; At peace my throb - bing
reign,
breast.
-0- -0- -0-
-u — u — Ts-
-0- -0- -0-
iiiiii
Oh, the
Oh, the
-t-
wM
rest, the per - feet
rest, etc.
■th-
reat, W hich
t=r=£
5
S
1=2-
:zk
23
F
£
£=£
S
J
-*-
r=
3
*
r
A-
^
H
-<> — L_
now t<» me is giv'n ; Mv soul, with
:fcz=^i=zz?=ji=
^:
gii
full sal - va - tion blest, En
-0- -0- -0- . -0- -0- -0-
joys
con - Btant heav'n.
m
-v — v-
fc£
E=*
*
^=
■42-
S. By passing storms I oft was driven,
As on the ocean tossed ;
But sweeter calm at once was given,
When I the Jordan crossed. — Chorum
T
How strange that I so long should roam;
A way so rough pursue, —
Shouldst make the wilderness my home,
With. Canaan just in view. — Chorus.
i
68
WHEN THE TEMPEST PASSES OVER,
Lively.
*=i
-£
-0
-0-
-0-
-0~
— N V
*
*
*
&-
i
t
:&
-V — I-
«-
0-
-0r
-0-
0-
0
Words and Music by Rev. I. Bai/tzei/L.
— 0-
0-
0
-0-
-0-
0-
t
0~
1. We are sail - ing on
2. Mill-ions have al - read
9M
jLflf— 1?=
-i —
the old ship of Zi - on, We are
■ y reached the blest har - bor. And are
<?-
&■
■«-
^0-
-* — <?-
sail-ing to the home of t he blest
singing with the lov'd gone ba - fore :
N N N r> |
&---* — r-'S'-r
-# w—
Where the
Mill - ions
v— v-
.^_£:
-0-
0-
^=tt
-y-
-i —
tfji— p_p F
-*r-* — * — ft
i
=t
i
£
±
i±2£
-#-
*
-<*-
P
-0
-0-
4i.
Chorus.
When the
■<5K
751-5—
ho - ly an - erels wait for our
more are sail - ing o - ver the
coin - in?
riv - er
rrii"
e
In
To
the
their
cit - y where (he saints sweet- ly rest,
mansions on that beau - ti - ful shore.
,S ,S i^ ,N
■0 0 0 0—0 0 0 1-*5---
| 1 _| _+.
Wiien the
When the.etc.
tempest passes o-ver, When the tempest passes o- ver,
r^.li — 0 — 0 — 0 — 0-
-0-
-0-
-0-
v-v-v—v-
0—0
-I i tt-
-0-
.#
£=
-0-
%
-0-
■+-,-
-.0-
-*-
V — i/-
We will meet each other there on
N N N N
the shore.
-0-
-0-
>=F
-+■
-t-7-
v— v— v-
-0-
:t
:t:'
all
3 Spread your canvas to the winds — let the breezes
Gently waft the noble ship to the shore ;
All on board are sweetly singing to Jesus,
Who will bring them to the bright evermore.
Chorus. — When the tempest, etc.
4 When we all are safely landed in heaven,
We will gladly shout our dangers are o'er;
We will walk about the beautiful city,
And we'll sing the happy s >ng evermore.
Chorus. — When the tempest, etc.
Words from "American Mission ary/*
Andante.
THE LORD HATH HEED OF ME.
Jkislc by D. G. Korris.
C59
M
=fc
2*
-*±i:
z±
^«
4:5
£
1. One thought sub -lime-ly sweet, Wher-e'er
2. When friends are cold or far; What-e'er
£
K*S?
-#— f*
-#^P
T\
r — r
Chorus.
my wand'rings be,
of life betide,
E
-1 —
j jjjjU
j
2*
■4-
=t
H-
-# — #-J-
-0— *-%-
3=
-y-
One star
Thou art
5*
1
r
to guide my feet:
my guid - ing star;
^
0 — 4 — 1-*- J 7#?d 1 1— J d * T
S
The Lord hath need of me.
In thee I still a - bide.
A voice se - rene - ly sweet, Through silence, comes to me, " Here at my bleeding
k:
2:
r
-*-?
£
5
£
-0-
r
£e££
P
-p-
£
^p
Pi
^b^?
feet
-0-
I
I
1 J-^ 1-
■4. $. J J
s
still have need of thee."
I
PS
A
EE
f
When tears on some sad face,
In lonely vale I see,
The Lord is in that place, —
fcsome ^oul hath need of me.
Across the solemn tide
The Father's mansions be ;
On earth I must abide;
The Lord hath need of me.
5.
My longing soul, when thrilled
By some 8 weet sounding chord,
Or "with deep sorrow filled,
To dwell with Christ, my Lord.
.Dear Lord, I work and wait,
Where er thv footsteps be;
When at thy pearly ?ate,
Still, Lord, have need of me.
70
Moderarr.
ALMOST THERE.
i
I
#-
+
-4 — I
O— L
b^
*
"«*"
4-4
-a
*
*
m.
*=*
-T
U4
Rev. I. Baltzell
I
H
&-— --*— Nbzi
i
I
"Are we almost there? are we almost there?" Cries the weary saint as be siahs for home : Are tlioso t lie verd:.nt
"Are we almost there? are we almost there?" Where the river flows from the throne of God ; He loners to wake from
t5<- ^ _ „ -i&- ■&- -0- -&- -0- _ •&- ■#- -<^- ->^-
#— P-
■V-
&-
0-
_L
&
^
-1
:tzz
-0-
-&-
-\-
0-
-0-
-\9-
fcrzt
t"
-F—
F
=5&
+
r— r
IE
-F
r
r
h
-V51-
i —
i —
3. Ai'ow almost there? are we almost there? "Where the weary saint nev-er more shall roam, Ho walks by faith this
4. We are almost there, we are almost there, For the day-star gleams thro' the distant gloom; We'll soon be free from
trees that rear Their stately forms 'mid heav'ns high dome? Almost there, almost there,
life's dull care, To walk those yolden streets abroad. Almost, etc.
Hap-py tho't, we're almost there.
-(Sh
I
r
-i —
v — . -
.t
II
vale of care. And sings with joy, "We're almost home." Almost, etc.
toil and care, Oh then we'll sing, "We're safe at home." Almost, etc.
STAND THE STORM.
4
-&•'
-4*
-T-fa
^
sel's on
the ship
Hi- ves
■#■ -0- *
th »
of
sel.
BE
1-
f
^
tf
-3=
-0 —
o - cean, See it
Zi - on, Which hris
stran - ger, Sail with
:s?:~
glid
land
lis
Words and Music bv Rev. I. Bai.tzell.
:^_-
-N
K-
ii k sw ft - ly i y,
ed ihou-sands o'er,
o'er life's rough sea ;
Ps K-
And a-
Alid our
For we
-P
#
V -*-• » p • p
r > v ^ v— i
1{S
ft
*-
*
STAND THE STORM
{Concluded.^
is i Chorus.
mid
Cap
fear
the wilrl commo - tion, Hear tlv^ s-il
tain's Ju-dah's Li - on. He will guide
DO want or dan - per, Fiom all per
>-'-&- -0- ° -0- -&- -&-~
ors
us
ils
loud - ly
lo the
we are
v '• v '•
cry: Stand the storm! it wont be long, Stand the
shore.
free.
m
_
F
¥
*z
*:
t- — i-
S±t
h
"V
*-'
-I
V—
-«9
9
& -
F
f
t=1
It
H — f
:e=kz£=k:
v v *
-r-
storm,
I
3T
We will an
-fc-r-4-
chor, by and by
3t=
-#-
■-N-
fc
— i-
-t—
*-T-r#-
-K-
1 ' L> t> L> U' b
storm.it wont be Ion;;. We will an - chor, we will an -chor
~mi
■&—>
m
-y
0 • W
.*_
V i/-
hv and by,
■0- ' -6-
4/ — g-4-P-
by
Stand the
and by ; Stand the
tf
storm,
Stand the storm,
We will an
chor bv and hv
XL* '
0 — 0-±.0 — *-i—
\j \j \j \j v V V '• I i/ i/ i/ i/ i/ v "btfl
Btorm. it wont belong, Stand the storm.it wont he lorn:, We will anchor, we will anchor by and by, by and by.
_*4- .<*_ -A- _«_ ■» ■» * -» -~ ■» ■» j«_ ■» _•»_ • ^
BL-k |» |» j# it k - bJE
b — h — h — h — I h >^ — ■ '
? =*-
-#-
-I—
-v-
t
0-1-0— #_l_*ZI5f_# _# #.• # #_*-jl-#_^_ T
■1 'Mid the mighty wave's commotion,
'Mid the storm's terrific roar,
Our Captain stills the ocean,
And we'll surely reach the shore. — Cho.
5 Sinner, leave the land of folly,—
Leave a world of sin and pride ;
Come, be pure, be just and holy ;
Come, to glory with us ride.— Oto.
G When we gain the port of glory;
When we land on Canaan's shore,
We'll repeat tin' plerisinsr story.
As we shout for evermore.— C'/to.
:te±:
»
4-
TO BE THERE.
-<^~.-
fc#i
J*- Vf
-*^-M~4
*i&=t
gjbizji — j~p:
Music by Rev. I. Baltzeix;
-«
-£-^fc
*
-i 4 -
1. YV e speak of the realms of the blest, — Of that country so bright and so fair ;
-#■•#-•-•-■#-#•*■#- • ■#-*+-+- 4— «J- ?- -^-*+— :- ■
' r* — 0-0 — 0 — *-—0-r& 1 1 — r»— -*-— » — * — 0---0-r\
And
oft are its glo - ries con -
0^0
be to be there,
:|=EEfc£|^Ep3ir^
to be there.
to be there,
-tS<-
9::
^N
I
?^#
£#
to be there,
to be there,
\L/
to be there,
-0-1-0-
0, what must it be to be there?
^fW^HT^^^t
-^-*
We speak of its freedom from sin —
From sorrow, temptation and care;
From trials without and within ;
But what must it be to be there?
3.
We speak of its service of love,
The robes which the glorified wear,
The church of the First-born above;
But what must it be to be there ?
r
E
Then let us, 'midst sorrow and woe,
Still for heaven our spirits prepare,
And shortly we also shall know,
And feel what it is to be there-
COME, LITTLE SOLDIERS.
73
Spirited.
Words and Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
*nr
I
*^^
-0-
-0-
-0-
-0-
A-
-0
7=r
i- * -gr
5
: J
*T*
g
1. Come, lit- tie sol- diers, list in the ar - ray, March to the king-dom bright and fair; Fear-less of dan - ger,
2. Hark to the voie-es, bid -ding us welcome Home to the land where all are blessed ; Je - sus, our Cap* tain,
:;. Boon shall wo hear the voice of the Cap-tain Shouting a- loud, " The war is o'er; Come, lit - tie sol -diers,
0 » ' 0 * 0 ,_* 0 • 0 0 0 r - 0 0 0 r_J 0 ,__* £_• 0 0 0—
as
A
9-4-
-?rr-x
-#-^-#
v,
y
V
?
r
^/
~&
r~r
P
fc==i
±
Chorus.
_J N
S=fc
H-#-*— * 1-
-* y>
■5-
A-
5=5
-3F
-^y-
2-*_#
ztsz-a:
-#-•■
m
J2ZX.
SH
onward we're moving; Je- sus will l<jad us safe- ly there. GiQ-ry to Je-3Ufl! hear the chil - dren sing;
bids us go on-ward, Fighting to gain e - ter - nal rest.
come to your mansion, Come to your home on Ca-naan's shore.*1 _ ^_ -£2_
f ff f
+ '-0
FT
-0-
-0-
t. "
'J
-zrt
-0-
£
-o
?
-#-:— #
-# — #-
:l
»« ft
y
XT
:
i
k
h_^
■&=fc=£^
i
?
*^#
4-.JM-Tq
^
Glo - rv to Je-sus! hear the chorus ring; Christ is our Captain, he'll safely lead us On-ward to Canaan's happv laud.
AWAY, AWAY, AWAY.
«— =J- — J — #
Music bv Rev. I. Baltzel
d==z£d=£
*z
+
j /The morn-ing sky is bright and clear, A - way to Sah-bath School ; | 'Tis there we learn his ho- ly Word, And
* (Let each one in the class ap - pear, A - way to Sab-bath School ;j
*
H£
t=
F« • ',41k A
i
i
la-
?=P
&
P— P-
VT
f
-y y y
1— trt
Ff
w v
-x—v
\
J,
|z^zS3igz^J
4
-« — h
Azbdd^
13
\ — l
Chorus.
5^— FTzz*
9-
find the road that leads to God ; A-way, a - way, a - way. a - way, A- way to Sabbath School.
. ** -0. «. . h *.*.*..«. £ I !**•#-- away,
— *H-a— H h _ [ | T 0—^ $-\-p~~ f
0-4-0 — 0 0
A - way, a - May, a-
:y=pzzy:
p=y=
wdk
■p
-y-y
-fc-H
E
y=Pn«
-*-fflE
j^
■t
^
■*-5-* — J
2zlz2
s
4— M-
-? — J m
■0—J0--
way, a - way, A- way to Sabbath School, A - way, a - way, a - way, a - way, A - way to Sab-bath School
a-wav.
gi
A
t
^p
r~w — \rr
zpzzs:
£
£
£
-t
^=p=
?-:
2 In season let us all be there,
Away to Sabbath School ;
That we may join the opening prayer,
Away to Sabbath School ;
There we can raise our hearts to heav'n,
And praise the Lord for blessings given.
Away, away, &c.
IT
3 Let us remember, while at prayer.
When at the Sabbath School,
Our teachers' kindness, and their care,
Toward our Sabbath School.
We'll be submissive, good, and kind,
And every rule and order mind.
Away, away, &c.
m*
■(— r
Words by Lizzie Hammond
ECHOES FROM THE OTHER SHORE.
75
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
J w-A-KJ ... S
If -0- -0- I V~~
1. Hark ! I hear sweet voices singing Happy songs of long a - go ; Let me lis - ten to the ma- sic Of those
-0 — 0-
-0 — 0-
# -— 0 — 9- — 0-
~J— +
"S
Chorus.
*=*t
0—0~
t
-0 — 0-
J2~
0".
ju>
^^y
^T^
^— A-
ts N En M*
-0-±-
v~*0 0 . 0—r
0-^-0
±-0
-0-'j>
V
v — y
^=^
-*«-
strains so sweet and low. O, sweet echo from the shore beyond the river,"\\ here the saints wait to welcome pilgrims
/T\
4r~0
:*r
+•••?- +'
%
or
X
^ n s
j — * — 0-
?-~
-^
-v-
'o V v '6 u b v
V
•^-?
iE5
JEL
Jc
y^
2^-v
s^^s
^
22
-r^-
I am watching for the dawning
Of the light upon my path ;
-t— Where the shadow-gloom shall
-ff never wrath.
.£_ Cloud the future with its
3.
Lonp I've wait.. 1 l'nrthodawning
oer; O my soul longs to go beyond the river, To the land where pilgrims weep no more. Of this light upon my way ;
Now I feel that life is waking
■«*•. - .+- - - . - m . m m . m -+•*.* - *- -f- •?- -0- m _. In th^ hallowed light of day.
\
-J— -J
0~
0
-0-' -0-0-1-0-
t
■0^0-
-1
2
\J V l> V
-g-
■0-
-0-
*=?■
» ^ ^ U
6'
CLo! the sands of lit'.' are ebbing,
And I'm near the other shore;
Spirit echos kindly welcome, —
Weary pilgrims, weep no more.
76
J,
WHITE AS SNOW.
Words and Music by Rev. I. BaltzeiA.
1. je-susdied on the tree, That the world might be free; See him "bleeding ana dying on t>loody Cal- va-
2. Free to all is the blood, By the mer - cy of God; Couie and try it and prove it, its power you shall
-£=£
w
*— p-
^
#— #^
0— ?
§^
B±
?s
*-•-*
*
i — i — r
£=£
1=^:
-P— P-
-i — h
--— t-
>
!• ^ ^
-Z5T ^ ' ^ - ' -Z5I-
ry. Oh, the bright crimson tide From the dear Saviour's side ! It can wash me, it can cleanse me, and my soul is sanctified,
know, Come to Jesus just now, At his feet humbly bow; He will hear you, he will save vou, he will wash von whit<j as snow.
#*-*-
=fc
-F--P-
^F^
V— ?-
I * •
f?
i — y — y — y — f* — r — r- - <* f * T L L
-V— iZ-M-
l/^
Chorus.
a , unorus. k • . , ^ p> v
atni<
* ,N
r<jt
*-*
Si
y -st
'Tis a truth I long'd to know, Jesus washing white as snow ; Now I know it, now I feel it, He can wash lue white as snow.
0- '-0—0—0-
ft
A
try
p-p-#
fv h
V \/ v
^ y y
Andante
ANGELS GALLING.
77
Arranged for this Work bj B. t\ />
f=>=t.
2-1
-&
-&
- /What sweet strains of music fall low on my ear, )
_ (In tones so de - light-ful? Oh, list! that ye hear j Those rich, flowing notes; Oh, how sweet and how clear, —
D.C. Breathe rapture un - told from some heavenly sphere.
^~»
3^t
'/± Jt JL±L ±1 JL. jSL. JL +.
3C3E
FT
-w — # — #
0.^ 0.
S
1— r
=F=FT^
fcfci
>2_
Chorus.
H-J-r
I
A-fc
r^-rV
J4-H-J-
ff * «i
-# * — 0 0 -\-0 0—0 0-
■0 . * 9— *
c&^
0r—^0 -
s&
j?: 'J* "
^'
7^
[
An-gels calling, sweetly calling. Weary wand'rer, come; Gladly greet them, let them lead you To their glorious home.
come,come away,
2 'Tis the sweet flowing music that steals o'er the wave
Of Jordan's lone river, whose billows I brave;
'Tis the music of angels, who hastes to bear
My soul o'er the waters to that blessed shore. — Cho.
Concluded from
3 O, 'twas love pure and free
Gave the ransom for me:
I will praise him, adore him, while traveling here below;
O, 'twas love for my soul
That his blood made me whole,
Praise the name of Christ, our Saviour, for he washes
white as snow. I
3 A glimpse of bright glory now beams on my sight,
I sink in sweet visions of heav'n's dawning light;
Bright spirits are whisp'ring so soft in my ear
Of heaven, sweet heaven! I long to be there. — Clio.
opposite page.
4 Do you long to he free?
Hear him speaking to thee, — [know ;
Come and welcome, thrice welcome, my mercy you shall
Come to Jesus to-day.
He will show you the way
To the ever-cleansing fountain, and wash you white as
snow.
78
Words by Rev. A. A. Gutu.y
-|- — i—
9-
0
7*-*
.r_> S—
TO JESUS THEN GO.
N i
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
-#-
-a-
0
--i — i — i — i — i — i-
0—0—0 0 — -m-
-a — *) — 0—0 — 5"
-N- N— N— K
#
0
-0-
'0'
-0-
'0'
~0~
-0-
-^--N-
i.
9
V
Oh think not, dear children, because you are young, No blood of atonement you it ed. The heart is de-coit-fol. un-
b'rom life's early dawning you wandered a-\vay, And broad was the road that yon look ; But God has reiuernUer'd tiie
m*
-i —
3_:
-0-
■i —
-0
-0-
V \J.\J
-0-
0-
V >>
-I —
-0 —
■#-•■#-
-y-
t
• V V v v
tzj<
V-
-i — i—
-#— #-
-I r—
_l |
-c — e-
-i h
V"
-b-b-
-9-
-&-
-h—
~b-
i=z^zLjU4JL4z±
Chorus. "7s
-N — N — N — I N-i — k — k-
Ov
0-
-0-
0-
-0-
-0-
-0-
-0~
-0-
~0~
'0
0
4:
-0~
ru -
s.ns
l.v
of
the tongue, And sin - ful
each dav, And writ-ten
the tho'ts and
them down in
the
h.S
de d.
book.
To
rlo
Je-sus tl. en
Je-sus, etc.
He loves you, I know; His
rrs
be tm-1
Tho' t!ie heart is clefilftfl.
^ a- *• "V
— 4» — O — r(-
-vp—&. — 0 — 0 -
^f- — a — a—o—
mer-cy c m
•9- -0- -0~
3 Oh, think not. wli >n childhood and youth are no more,
That Jesus will reign in the heart ;
For folly and pleasure may enter the door,
And tender affections depart.— Qu>.
He
will welcome a child. And g.ve him a plac- in his fold.
*-l
4 Delay, then, no longer, give Jesus your heart,
He'll wash its defilements away ;
Forsake your vain pleasures, secure the "good part,"
And taste of its sweetness to-day.— Cho.
WE'RE COMING, DEAR SAviOUR. 79
Words and Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
-T S,— ^
-9-
-0-
-a
z
# .
i
n d 3 3 81^X4
Si*
pftrfi
1. We're coming, we're coming, dear Saviour; 0, welcome us homo; We're coming to love thee for ev - er;
JL A #. ^t -*-#■• ■#-*••-■#-■#- ' — ^ A #- A #• #■ ■*-•
<#
A
^n
ChorUS. com
ptw
v — ? — t? — V-
T=F
wc re com
V
mg,
-P • *
§5
ft
Yes, Saviour, we come
-#-? (9 — # — # — r*-^ — 0
L> [) V
^—P-
]/ ]/ V
We're coming, we're coming,we're coming,we're coming, We're coming,dear Saviour.to
FT'
IS > N
A_>-x
3t::
i
v — ? — y-
-
V J U ]J J <j
^-^— V-
V V V \J J 'J
T P •
^
V v \j
We're com
id;
were com
lug,
rh
±=±=
P
e t
~9~
U U' U> l> U>
S
• • • U U>
thee ; We're coming, we're coming, we're coining, we're coming, We're coming, dear Saviour, to thee.
-P * H 1 ! # — 0 — 9 — Hs — m — m — £ — 2 — 1 — r*— * * » * #— t-*-5 — i
-?—*-
1
i —
f
v
1—&
/—/—/—/-
&:
We're coming, we're coming, dear Saviour
To meet tlie glad band;
To ring hallelujah forever
With them, in that land. — Clio.
We're coming, we're coming, dear Saviour,
Thy glory to see ;
y V D
A home with thy children forever,
Give, Saviour, to me. — Cho.
4 We're coming, to tell the glad story
To Jesus our Kinar ;
And then, with the children in glory,
His praises we'll sing. — Cho.
F=±
FEAR NOT THE DARK WAVE
Music by Rev. I. Baltzeix.
1 f I am waiting upon the green shore,
' \ Ev-er fearing the billows that roar
■#-*- #- -*--/«-
-V-bh
-0— h
I am weary and faint with delay ;
Ever [Omit].
*— » — 0 — »— *
=£
-y-y-t — -y-y-
t
I
■-#— »— »-
t— y-y-j — y-y-
The grepn shore,
Billows roar,
-* P— #-
ea
#— *
^-^
j dreading the mist - cover'd way ;
'r5>-
£
-#— F-
rrtT-c-p-^ri^
r
I
I
V
#=
— ! — I-
q^3
iV
_9- ^«_
-PS-PS—
—4-
«
fc±
^-2
: — j-p-L* — *
£=£
i
*=*£
n
And 0, if my Saviour would come, To convey me across the dark wave, O, were I safe-ly land-ed at
Saviour, come,
#. JI-JLJZ- JLJL
#-.*-#. ■#-*-
i
I
Pf
tt
^
Chorus. JAvely.
±z=h
**
home, Never more the dark waters to brave,
landed home,
=t
Fcar not, dread not the dark rolling wave, Thy Saviour is near
-0 0-0-0-
-y-y-
v-v-
iwffc
££
#.#.#.'
-»--• L-
TTT~^
FEAR NOT THE DARK WAVE.-Concluded.
m
"9" "W "€r"
#
J
£=*
4
PS
H ^— f
g «[■ #
£
trf
Rit.
#-• #
81
-*^r
thee, he's mighty to save ; Then fear not the waters, he'll soon land us o'er, We'll all meet again on the bright gleaming shore.
m
%
-0—0-
^=^Tfff^
£i£
-0-'-0—0-
+- 4L-+-JL- M.
ft
1 — u v \ — y— ^
r--f---ff
t
b=£=
-y-
<4*
#
5
J-
/T\
£=£
E£E
l>0
Then no longer I fear the dark wave,
For so many have passed by this way ;
To the land where ray Saviour has gone,
I will hasten, no longer delay.
For thousands have forded the stream,
And have safely attained yon bright shore ;
.fever sorrow or danger to fear,
For all sorrow and danger are o'er. — Cho.
I am waiting upon the green shore,
But I fear not the waves as they roll :
"When the Saviour shall call, I'll pass o'er
To the beautiful home of the soul.
There brothers and sisters, and all
Who have left us in days that are past,
Will be waiting to welcome us home,
To the beautiful land of the blest. — Cho.
1
m
fcg ^r-fr
ir
i
-0 — 0-
0~
COME TO JESUS NOW.
-r-4-
i±i^=i
S&s
*~.-4-*-*-Z$.
1. Come to Je- sus, Come to Je- sus, Come to Je - sus now ; He will save you, He will save you, He will save you now.
b*-*-4-r=g:
N
*—*-
x=t
«>. d'
-X
'-0--—0.-L0.
±t
-&-
m
2 He will save you, &c.
3 Oh, believe him, &c.
4 He'll receive you, &c.
5 Flee to Jesus, &c.
6 He will hear you, &c.
7 He'll have mercy, &c.
jfcr
.0-
-0-
F
«-p*=p^
0 0- -I I
8 He'll forgive you, &c.
9 He will cleanse you, &c.
10 Jesus loves you, &c.
8sa
Moderato.
PILGRIMS OF THE NIGHT.
pi
&£=}
£-&-! — Umv
^
■M±MiKJi
t=3=£=t
-0—0-
i
5
-^4-
**■-*£■*-*
N Is
-#— #-
-I—
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
-*i — «-
3
-#— •-
1
L Hark, hark, my soul, angelic songs are swelling O'er earth's green fields,And ocean's wave-beat shore; How sweet the truth those
2 Onward we go, for still we hear them singing, " Come, weary souls, for Jesus bids you come !" And, through the dark, its
mm
-0±-
in
v=m
£Bi
-0-
■0- -&-
y—V—yh
t
*=t
-0—0-
5E
V
^w^w-
-+
¥^-*i
V V V \> if
pT C"
h— h- 1 — *— r« — J^-V^J 1^
P J J — 5E -i ! — h-"— sr«h
I*-*-*
u&~
-K-4-
=4=^=
blessed strains are telling Of that new life, when sin shall be no more,
echoes sweetly ring- iiig, The music of the gospel leads us home.
Chorus
^ — i j i , *-
^=
e
^zzs:
Angels of Je- sus, Angels of light,
+- *- -0-
tittt r '' *>*
= — # — #-^ » !<y— it -0 — f — 0 — 0-
U— U — y—Q. STiTJZ
-0-
+- #■ ■#■ -*>-
V— V— V—V-&
»
1=
=£=f
Hz::
■y— y-
£^M
ls«.
i— *-
s
p— P-
-/Pr-Zlr9] —0 a
21
Sing - ing to welcome the pilgrims of the night, pilgrims of the night.
■0- ■*■*£■ £ £ tL +- -0- It
Sig
-^-
r
3£
V
tr—y—y—br
BO. :^_p
4 Rest comes at last, tho' life be long and dreary,
The day must dawn, and darksome night be past;
Faith's journey ends in welcome to the weary,
And heaven, the heart's true home, will come at last. — Cho.
3 Far, far away, like bells at evening
pealing'
The voice of Jesus sounds o'er land
and sea ;
And laden souls by thousands meekly
stealing,
Kind Shepherd, turn their weary
steps to thee. — Cho.
5 Angels, sing on ! your faithful watches keeping;
Sing us sweet fragments of the songs above;
Till morning's joy shall end the night of weeping.
And life's long shadows break in endless love. — Clio.
Moderate.
FOR EVER THINE,
A— k-
i*
3t=f=±
d=*
&->-
Words and Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
83
s
^-1=1
>•
J— j.-i?
St
*
r
-V— *
:?
— *-
P ^
1. Je - sus, I come to thee, Just as I am ;
2. Je- sus, thou bleeding Lamb
3. Je - sus, I plead with thee
Just as I am ; I would from sin be free, 0, bleeding Lamb, Mv heart by sin oppress'd
ib, Now pity me : All sin-fulness I am, O, set me free. Thou art my on- ly choice •
, Just as I am ; Now wash me, make me free, Thou bleeding Lamb. My heart is all defiled • '
P' • P' P P
p p* • &
-»--*
-&L
*T^>
-P—P±-P—t-
pi
fet
-t— ;
V-
£
v-
f
-N-- &■
S
±3t
-fi-
at
J:
-i^-
Longs for thy peaceful rest ; Lord, take meto thy breast ; For ever thine.
O, let me hear thy voice, Which bids the soul rejoice ; For ever thine.
Dear Saviour, meek and mild, Make me thy loving child ; For ever thine.
Jesus, the way is bright ;
Praise to thy name ;
I see thy glorious light, —
I feel the flame.
Jesus, no more I'll roam,—
I'll wait the hour to come
When thou wilt call me home,-
For ever thine.
%
-5-
— l-
i ' i
!=*=£
-i-
-h—PK-
-m-
-m-
ALL TOGETHER.
d d d
T
Music by Rev. I.
,S
-m-
0-
A-
Baltzell.
J
-f—
9— +
We
We
We
We
love
love
love
love
3
to sing to - geth - er, Our hearts and voices one ; To praise our heav'nly Father, And his e- ter-nal Son.
to pray to - geth - er, To Je- sus on his throne, And ask that he will ev- er Accept us as his own.
to read to - geth - er, The word of saving truth, Whose light is shining ever To guide our early youth,
to be to - geth - er, Up - on the Sabbath day, And strive to help each other A-long the heavenly way.
T j t . f f -p- •••*-■*- •■•-■*- -p- <p- -p- _ rs in
84.
u
k-fci=
?J2=J
--!— 1 fr-fe-N-fr
5
SWEEPING THROUGH J HE GATES.
Y/ords and Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
3=p=- J-.-#4^£
*^
-*-*~t-^-*-^£ r~ *— *
* L-i 0-0—0 *— *
22.5
1. I'm sweeping t'ward the golden gate, Wash'd in the blood of the Lamb; My lov'd ones there in raptures
golden gate,
m&
33
3?
# -•--#-
i r
^-»-
0—0-0-0-
s v
P^P
i
-b
^
r
_-_._#.
-^-^-«-
ITf
V— P-
jaml
-*!-*
3=3;
H
■P-1"
"4 lj ^
y ^— ^ _ S (S v I'm sweep - ing thro' the gate.
Sweep
ing
*~fe
:#JrM
0^-0 0'-0-0 '-0
U I. W ! :
wait.Wash'd in the blood of the Lamb. I'm sweeping,yes, I'm sweeping thro'the golden gate,I'm sweeping, yes, I'm sweeping
S§
z£
»-s
#i
=£
p*—p-
\
(5?-^
I -4- — — I — F
j l i__ 4 4 —
■0 '-ppft^j0ZW.±JffJftJZ0
jf=p—p=2ft-
I I ^b^^M II
1 U P
thro' the gate,
I'm sweep
&
B
^zd5.
-ji*
=fc
Tfil-
n—n*
-!-
ing thro' the gate,
N i
0?— 0— 0± -0— 0^—0
E£££&±^=E
2-^tf i
p—^-
uu
-0^-0
^m
i
thro' the gold - en gate, I'm sweeping, yes, I'm sweeping thro' the golden gate, Wash'd in the blood of the Lamb.
■^-#V» » • X0' 0 0' 0 0' 0 0' 0 I 0 P f" , ■ P P ' P m WT-M-T&--
r^rr-i r5— *-V* a a P — r»--#— #—#—#-
9^-^icgz^^EXZr^F-X-l 4-tr
rii-vum
-N-4
THERE SHE'S RESTING.
(After a Funeral.)
85
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
3
*=^=s=j:
%
9
e
-0-
9-
q
4- ^ — j. .g. 4-
1. In her grave-robes calmly sleep-ing, Lies our sis- tor, still and cold; But herspir-it, ar. - gels waft- ed
2. Now with-in that safe enclo-sure. Her purespir-it, freed from cares, In thebo-som of her Sa-viour
I
.*=£-
1 tTT
f
-# — #-
* #_
-=(-
i — m — r^-
f^=^=f
±£
i
A
Bit.
QEJ
IS-
J
3tr^:
+
Bit,
hd
JZ
To the ten-der Shepherd's fold; There she's resting, there she's resting, Rest-ing in the
She his love and fa - vor shares, For she's resting, for she's resting, &c.
&-
Shepherd's fold.
$:=
zfez:
r^-
£
£
*
£
1-
T=^
t
S>_
3.
When on earth, our sister with us
Sang the songs of Jesus' love;
Now, with saint and angel voices,
Slugs the songs of heaven ahove.
For she's resting, etc.
4 Saviour, grant us each thy blessing,
That, when life with us is o'er,
We may meet our sainted sister
On the bright and peaceful shore.
There she's resting, &c.
ft"
2 I soon shall reach the golden shore,
Washed in the blood of the Lamb;
When I shall sing for evermore,
Washed in the blood of the Lamb. — Cho.
3 I'm Hearing now the pearly gate,
Washed in the blood of the Lamb;
I hear the songs of those who wait,
Washed in the blood of the Lamb. — Clio.
Concluded from opposite page.
I'm sweeping through, — O, happy home,
Washed in the blood of the Lamb;
The holy angels bid me come,
Washed in the blood of the Lamb. — Cho.
I've gained at last the city bright,
Washed in the blood of the Laud):
I've joined the ransomed robed in white,
Washed in the blood of the Lamb. — Cho.
t
86
i
¥
Z^j—J-J—J-3
4-
£M0 M£/*0,
-1—4
a
tl
N
Arr. by J. C. Middleton.
i
g#i
*^*
f
3=4
#-^-^
F
za
' ■ ; f .
1. Land a - head ! oh, see the sig - nal Flashing bright - ly from the shore ! Far a - way, oh, see the
2. Lolthe ves - sel's nearing heaven, O'er the bounding waves it flies, Seethe pi - lot looking
'+- -F--F- -F- *-± - Is
$:* g
t=£
tiiti
g^f-*
PP
&
=3=
Chorus.
idM
&
*
V-
¥-*-+-
Wr*-*
-0 — *-
r
*-*-*-
r S"~* ' ' ~'~ — r^
Rocks and storms I'll fear no more, When on
Rocks and storms, etc
H
cit - y,
o - ver,
Soon we'll reach the blissful shore.
Land a -head! heloud-ly cries.
%=£
£
^
s±t
5
hUU4
£S
m=t=i=t^E±s,\
+~.
fjz±^==^:^=^i^=i
4-1^-4
r
*
^T~#-
that e-ter-nal shore,
.it f'f f fc-£rf 'f g~ t-rg-f-'-f
Drop the anchor, furl the sail,
£
t=s
am safe within the vale.
IS
F
1— t—v-
1 — i
See the walls of jasper shining
In the light of Eden's day !
See the pearly gates wide open,
* See the glorious golden way. —
Cho.
Hark ! the thrilling songs of glory
Floating o'er the silver wave ;
Join we, too, the heavenly chorus,
"Jesus, Jesus died to save."~CAo.
Onward sweeps the noble vessel,
In the harbor now we glide ;
Anchor cast, all safely land,
We are with the glorified. — Cho.
THE LITTLE WANDERER.
87
'jhrfr 3 i ) _>, — ^ — — N k r> i , N ^ k i i N ? n
i=±
^S
i-^-dH
1. Je-
2. Je -
sus, to thy dear arms I flee, I have no oth - er help but thee : For thou dost sufl'er me to
sus, I'll trv my cross to hear, I'll follow thee and never fear; From thy dear fold I would not
±
j2Z-
&-
v=z
ft
J V V
*=£-
:&
t,
I
in
*3
V U> V
Ril.
v— v— *
r=*
-^
O take a little wand'rer home, O take a lit-tle wand'rer home.
O take a little wand'rer home, O take a lit-tle wand'rer home.
3.
t Jesus, I cannot see thee here,
*- Yet still I know thou 'rt verv
near
0 say my sins are all forgiven,
And I shall dwell with thee in heaven.
4.
And now, dear Jesus, I am thine,
0 be thou ever, ever mine,
And let me never, never roam
From thee, the little wanderer's home.
JESUS HIGH IN GLORY.
*— N-
T?
,N h
1.
2.
3.
4.
sm
M
W
s-±
-&-
E
Je-sus, high in glo - ry, Lend a list'-ning ear, "When we bow before thee, Infant voices hear.
We are lit - tie children, Weak, and apt to stray, Saviour, guide and keep us In the narrow way.
Save us, Lord, from sinning, Watch us day by day ; Help us now to love thee, Take our sins away.
Then, when Jesus calls us To our heaven-ly home, We will answer gladly, " Saviour, Lord, we come."
JL JL M.JLJLJS.JL -£2_ 4L JL JL £ .«. +. *- A-^.
S
^^
X
-P h *-
i
H
p=?==r
H 1-
£?
■4 t
T
88
TOILING UP THE WAY.
*
By Permission
v
J3F
j-*-
3
I
1. _ We are toil - ing up tne way, .Narrow way, narrow way ; We have journey'd many a day T'ward the Kingdom ;\
T'ward the distant shining land, Golden land, golden land, Where the heavenly harpers stand In the Kingdom,
hough the journey may be long, Hard and long, hard and long, We will cheer it with a song Of the Kingdom;
We shall en-ter by the cross, Blessed cross, blessed cross ; Gaining gold that hath no dross, In the Kingdom.
*§
0' 0 ■ »* 0 0*0 .0 0
i
0—0-
0—r0' 0 -0^-0— r0 0—0-
-&T
^^
t
-*—*\
ft*
Chorus.
§
i
■&— rV
d
t
N— V
t
tr
M=^
iE£*
EP
*=t
Still we sing, Christ, our King, Walks with us the weary
s
*j.
Lte^J
#- -•-• -#-
way, And the shining an - gels
ff:
i
b
B
£££e£^
rt
h V:
£eMe^
fc£
£
!
¥=?
¥?
M
'J-
ZM
—&■
-*eezi
-&-
wait, an - gels wait, an - gels wait,
To un - bar the golden gate Of the King - dom.
mm
u
EEEE3EEEE^^E=EEgE|E
a
Eff
i^Ei
f=T=B
WHITE ROBES.
-&-
J3
mm*mM
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
89
-- 1 '
=P
-A-&:
m
m&
1. Who are those arrayed in white, Brighter than the noonday sun! Foremost of
2. These are they. who bore the cross; Nobly for the Master stood; Suff'rers in
0—0-r-0 . 0—0—0 i ^ -P—0_-t-=-t—* — #
the suns of light, Nearest
his righteous cause, Foll'wers
W=F
-«■
£
£
tfc±
f-
i/ii/i/
t
U— V— V-
b b I 1/ b b
Chorus.
Mkm
r
iv
-i^
the eternal throne. J They have clean robes, they have white robes, Wash'd in Jesus' blood divine
nf Kmanupl (inH i Mav a plflan rnhw tnav a. vrhit.o rr»h» < rtm.it Wash 'H i
of Emanuel, God
May a clean robe, may a white robe, ( Omit.
Wash'd in Jesus' blood, be mine.
r
Out of great distress they came ;
Wash'd their robes by faith below
In the blood of yonder Lamb —
Blood that washes white as snow.
4. Clad in raiment pure and white,
Victor-palms in every hand,
Through their great Redeemer's might,
More than conquerors they stand.
Joy and gladness banish sighs ;
Perfect love dispels all fears :
And forever from their eyes
God shall wipe away their tears.
3. We shall gather home at last,
Sorrow past, sorrow past ;
We shall hold our jewels fast
In the kingdom ;
We shall dwell in perfect light,
Holy light, holy light,
Never dimm'd by tears at night,
In the kingdom. — Chorus.
Concluded from opposite page.
14. We shall know each other there,
Over there, over there,
When our angels rohes we wear
In the kingdom ;
All that's purest, holiest here,
Grows more dear, grows more dear
In the mansions drawing near,
In the kingdom. — Chorus.
90
i Moderate).
BEAUTIFUL LAND ON HIGH.
i
^^
Arranged for this work.
IS v N__, S
*
-6 — fr— fr P fr T * c- t s-hsI— k — a— n — ^—^
£#
tlTE
^
<£*—+
1. There's a beau - ti-ful land on high ; To its glories I fain would fly ; When by sorrow press'd down, I
2. There's a beau - ti-ful land on high ; I shall enter it by and by ; There with friends hand in hand, I shall
^
-*• -0- ■&-'-*- -9- -0-
L I iTT. L-h — \—
m
w— u-
■^-^
f±
XL
v — g-v
0\0-
Vr-V;_
-v—v-
■#-* -0- -0- -0- -0- -0-'-0- -0- -0-
~\ 1 1 -F T-T^' + -P-— u-
p^^4
e=±
0\-0 — 0—
i^ — P-V — I—
A
M
f-r
H^3
^
h ft
£
Chorus.
m
v=§rt
±
n
tt
v
PM^
j=J=J
-g — a
-* — *
£*H$
r
*-.v
long for my crown, In that beauti- ful land on high. Tn that beau-ti- fill land I'll be,
walk on the strand, In that beauti -ful land on high. In that beau-ti - ful land, etc.
From
. i l- 4r h h ^Hi hs \sr
E=U=^-» ^-V-lfr-i-fr-i far"
#-#
p---» » #- -W--—W-
«v^£
it
£
<M#
Si
-t£-£
g--
F3
N fci *N
te^^afe^^fegs^jMfc^^g^
f
5fJ:
earth and its cares set free ; My Jesus is there, he has gone to prepare A home in that land for me.
1
m
yiri
it
JE
I
it
-fed
:» • L k1
1 fif f T-£~-f-
f :*
13
JUST A? I AM
TT ^-^ J f7
Arranged for this work.
91
•#-r
K-— [ Nt-
l.Just as I am, with-out one plea, But that
2. Just as I am, and wait-ing not To rid
thy blood was shed for me,
my soul of one dark blot,
And that thou bid'st me
To Thee, whose blood can
mtif, f. fJ=M It.l
••fif f r; ij
t
4r^-V=&
y
FS
;n u k N \Rit.
m
come to Thee ! O ! Lamb of God, I
cleanse each spot, O! Lamb of God, I
II 1 -if I I 1 :
come,
come.
S!
V v )
S
V V i
3EE
T. Just as'I am — poor, wretched, blind ;
^ Sight, riches, healing of the mind ;
"Yea, all I need, in thee I find ;
O, Lamb of God, I come.
Just as I am — though toss'd about,
• With many a conflict, many adoubt;
Fightings within, and fears without
), Lamb of God, I come.
5.
Just as I am — thou wilt receive,
Wilt welcome, pardon, cleanse, re-
Because thy promise I believe [lieve,
O, Lamb of God, I come,
Just as I am — thy love, unknown,
Has broken every barrier down ;
Now to be thine, yea, thine alone,
O, Lamb of God, I come.
Concluded from opposite page.
3. There's a beautiful land on high,
Then why should I fear to die ;
When death is the way to the realms of day
In that beautiful land on high ?
4. There's a beautiful land on high,
And ray kindred its bliss enjoy ;
Methinks I now see how they're waiting for me,
In that beautiful land on high.
5. There's a beautiful land on high,
And though here I oft weep and sigh,
My Jesus hath said that no tears shall be shed
In that beautiful land on high.
6. There's a beautiful land on high,
Where we never shall say, " good bye !"
When over the river we're happy forever,
In that beautiful land on high.
WE COME, WE COME.
Arranged for this work.
1
f We come, we come, with loud ac-claim, "We come, we come, with loud acclaim, Let hills and val -leys sound his fame, Let
\ Let the Ke-deem-er's praise a - rise, Let the Ke-deeni-er's praise a - rise, From all that dwell be - low the skies, From
sound
low
1
:str
-£?-
Chorus. ,N fc
=zirztr*vz*=£
is fc h s
±f±
^-fr
I I I 5_i_^J
y-tf-
*r-0.
0-
^
t*
-PS--N
^->v-^
. 0-0'- 0
lit
-<3-
H-
23=-
his fame. 1
the skies. /
Then shout and sing ye ransom'd sons of glory, For Jesus saves you from the fall ;
We
rrr
hills and valleys sound his fame. 1
all that dwell below the skies. J
-#•-
jt^T
-v—ty
0.-J-0-
1
-Ps— 3-1
N_^__A
#f
0—0~-0
4—&--0-
t4±ki
i~ *-
-&
I
9:
soon shall go to tell the pleasing sto
mfc
f 0 •• TT -J
H— 4— h— R —
jrz^zzpz^z^z^zpz^
0
}sz=*]
ry, And crown the Saviour Lord of all
■0- -0-.-0- -0- l
-0- i ±1^—^-^-^—4—0-^
*•-%
$
f=E;
+
i
Your lofty themes, ye mortals, bring;
In songs of praise divinely sing;
The great salvation loud proclaim,
And shout for joy the Saviour's name.
In every land begin the song;
To every land the strains belong;
In cheerful sounds all voices raise,
And fill the world with loudest praise.
Lively.
j Livel
±=fc=i
-0-
-0-
-0
ft 00#f ro ME.
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell
93
-N-K
3«:
--N-
:g
t-H-f
0 0^L
1, O, come to me
2. 0, come to me
B:ri7-4-
^
at the morn-ing hour, While the world is so fresh with dew, While life is fair, and you
in the sweet spring-time, Ere the flowers of youth are past, While no foes you fear, and no
5>- -V- ht- Vt- P *(?• fy ,T i f — F n-
JCd
V— ^
I
:g~~r
^_^:
?
i#_*iis:
«E
-»-
^=fe
-t-T-f
v-v-
*=*-
*=tc
^K — — #— #-
:z^
-N-N
S N
IP
have no care; There is no oth-er friend so true. We come,
days are drear, And the clouds never o - ver-cast.
f-rf-r— ti
-# 0 0-
-0-0-
-0-0-
n
We come, Precious Saviour, we come to
A
;l.
-y— v-
v— ^~
fcE
S3
?—?—?
£=£
We come, we come, we come, we come,
vv-
to
gp3
£
i**"!-
£~:
=t
0—0-
f£
mm
thee We come
yes, we come •♦• ■
0—0-0
-I •-{—
j hr
-I N— N— 4 *-rS)v-m — O, come to me at the evening hour,
€ J~~J — ^ — #, | i~|T J-'re tne senses by sleep are still ;
0—0—* — ^JZ^'.-IX Come, taste tliis hour, all my pardon-
—I 1 — ing j,(,\vcr ;
We come.
\ — l-
-0-0-0-0-jr
-fcr-^-i — k^-V-
i=«=jT
f
-v^-V-
-#— »
Precious Saviour, we come to thee.
S S
**
-t— ! -J-V-
V-V-
thee While the morn is fair, and we have no care,
Come, aud bow to my righteous will.
Chorus.
4.
O, come to me ; come, ye youthful
throng,
~Z?. T There is no better time for thee :
J_ X I will
receive all who do believe,
They shall all my salvation see.
Chorus.
94
j Moderate.
I
m
evd
"22
PRECIOUS NAME.
K ■ I . I K
1
Music by Ret. I. Bai/tzell.
mm
-Sh
5
*
s
i
a
33
3
4+
*?
-y ■ y » — 9 g m - ■ » ^ — y-
1. Precious is the name of Je - sus,Who can half its worth unfold, Far beyond angelic prais- es, Sweetly
2. Precious, as the me-di - ator, By the Father rais'd on high ; Precious, when he took our nature, Laid his
3. Precious, when to Calv'ry groaning, He sustain' d the cursed tree ; Precious, when his death atoning Made ad
sung to harps of gold. Precious name, O, how sweet, Precious name, O, how sweet, Precious
aw - ful glo - ry by. Precious name, etc.
end of sin for me. Precious name, etc.
Precious name,
W=^t^t
H
O, how sweet,
Precious name,
0, how sweet,
E
^
S±J=*
■#-#
u— v
Rail.
■&
:z£
i
K— N
S
4#
>^3 ~S
name, O, how sweet,
Precious name,
O, how sweet,
O, how sweet.
§^Erf
t-t
j, now sweet,
-* — *
tt—zt
¥
b-i
221
4. Precious in his death victorious,
He the host of hell o'erthrows
In his resurrection glorious,
Victor crowned o'er all his foes.
Chorus. — Precious name, etc.
5. Precious, Lord, beyond expressing
Are thy beauties all divine ;
Glory, honor, power and blessing
Be henceforth forever thine.
Chorus. — Precious name, etc.
Words by Rev. W. Hunter.
HAPPY, HAPPY DAY.
U
I
I
£=£
2
i
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
95
mmm
4r»
^Eji
*3=
dZi
^
£?
^
1. Oh, bow can I forget the hour, When love divine I found ! The place was fill'd with sacred pow'r, And glory beam'd around.
'
*—?-
0—
^fczfzrzz
^L
t
r
£
1st
3L
&-
j Chorus.
I
*4
fr-s r ft
SZQ
I Is
£
Pff
-*_ *-
*t£
#' #
^
^^^^
r
>
_l — q «U?— _J — f
Hap-py, happy day, Ilap-py, hap-py day, When the Saviour wash'd my sins away,
a
I [ap-py, hap-py day,
yes,
9:
■0L* JL JL.' ^. J ' .*.• .*. ^.>
+.+-•+.*.•+.
i
?=*
V— J*-
i*2^
£W
I 1 I K
M
*
£-^— V
%
way,
=4=
yes,
V V V V
ft
N
•~#
"2?-
Hap-py, hap-py day .When the Saviour wash'd my sins away.
a
■»-•■»-■». fc
way.
^-'f-f-'f-^
■*-'-t>~
2.
My soul, relieved from sorrow's load,
From guilty bondage free,
Adored with joy the pardoning God,
That showed such love to me ! — Chorus.
3.
The scenes of nature, then how bright 1
My eyes rejoiced to view ;
I praised the Lord with warm delight,
And thought they praised him too. — Chorus.
My darkness then to light gave place,
My guilt to pardon li •
My rags of sin to robes of grace,
My bonds to liberty : — Chorus.
5.
I toiled no more a wand'ring child,
In slavish, base employ ;
But safe at home, my father smiled,
And feasted me with joy. — Chorus.
6.
And angels on their watchful posts,
With gladness hasted round
To tell to all the heavenly hosts,
" The long-lost child Lj i'ound." — Chorus.
96
THE CROSS! THE CROSS!
From " Guide to Holiness." By permission.
j Slow.
Music and Chorus by Bev. J. H. StockTOK.
i
+
±4
+^r
Pf
-&T>
-0 ' 0 0 ' 0-
+T-0
■7
y
1. The cross ! the cross ! the blood-stain'd cross ! The hallow'd cross I see ! Ke - mind-ing me of precious blood That
i
? i i =
» • #
^
§«
S3
?
£
e
FFF
\
i
Chorus. Slow and soft.
Slow and soft. /Tn i
:S
Up - on the er<
3-
3T=$
#?=?
(5*-
once was shed for me. Oh, the blood! the precious blood ! That Je-sus shed for me
/T\
££
-*2.
^P^
cross m
r--
fcfe
f
f
P
I/-4
>
i&^RJ
/r\
Ritard.
p^ — ' — i
-&-
I
crimson flood, Just now by faith I see.
~\
^ f r r ?
££
ffff
£
That cross! that cross! that heavy
My Saviour bore for me. [cross
Which bowed him to the earth with
On sad Mount Calvary. — Cho. [grief,
3.
How light! how light! this precious
Presented to my view ; [cross !
And while, with care, I take it up,
Behold the crown my due. — Cho.
The crown ! the crown ! ihe glorious
The crown of victory ! [crown I
The crown of life ! it shall be mine
When I shall Jesus see. — Cho.
5.
My tears, unbidden, seem to flow
For love, unbounded love,
Which guides me through this world of
And points to joys above. — Cho. [woe,
HOPE ON, HOPE EVER.
97
A\
k- 1. h 1
k. v k. S v ^
Music by Rev. I. Baltzetx.
V o r*
N v S s . M
h P n j s.
n p P r p r
* *. „ — ^ n . n > . v
fr^\ Q m
~J — ^ir~f~^~ir
* # • m~ — r
# ~s> — * * #— %
— — r_? — *t _| — . s — ; s
_l ' M \ M MM M
iv i; n f
— m* ^ mm m. mm
0 0 0- f.
0 0 0 * 9
w -a • — \— m — — — — ..
•>
1. Hope on and hope ev - er, our watchword shall be.Whiie sailing o'er life's troubled billows, We'll nev-er despair tho' the
r\«
0 m m m
0 0 0***
* 0 •
TT
U
«
J—^
000000
_^_^_# «_
-/ — y — U — U— > — ^-
rV » * i «-
0 0 0 0 0 0
\~
•
V V * V V V
' ' 1 \T
1 •
v v* v vYv
I
4-
A.
3=
TtZE
Vt:
^=#=
S2
clouds may grow dark, Or hang our bright harps on the wil- lows. Hope on, hope on, While
| iy hope on, hope on,
\i/
^
K
v — >'
£=£
*— *-
> — ?-
v-
ifctf
-#-=-
T/E
V
±
\z/
=^=i
_
0—0—0
4
fc-6
S l
-»- w
0-+
0.
3EI
sailing o'er life's troubled billows, Hope on,
#- +- *- *- ■»-
iope on,
hope on, Nor hang your bright harps on the willows.
hope on,
%
^=^
V
• * * •-
v y •— >-
v— #-
-* — #-
21
2T
y~y
#— ■# — #-
j^y-p-
y-vf
->-y-
v— f*-
fcl
N
s^
2. Hope on, and hope ever, no matter what comes,
While wand'ring thro' sorrow's deep places;
The hour before day is the darkest, they say,
Thus darkness and light interlaces. — Chorus.
3. Hope on, and hope ever, the heart's secret spring,
'Twill help us in life's earnest duty ;
'Twill lift us from trials, and sorrow and tears,
To visions of splendor and beauty. — Chorus.
98
W
m.
MURMUR Nut.
i
6 » * J-J-~=-
Music by Rev. I. Baltzeli^
u
£
*
m&Ei
^
*
£
33i
£
5^t
£^f*
*i
3^3
1. Murmur not, my soul, tho' here in sorrow, Thou dost count the weary, weary days, If it now be gloomy, yet the
2. Murmur not, my soul, altho' the flowers Blooming here shall surely fade a -way; Je - sus bids thee hasten to the
i
KEfe
u
6
S?
I
t.
$
$
*
f
b~*
tn^tn^"
*
*
\
P-?
I
I
£
Chorus.
3
P
t*
— 1 — *v~»
-t& — 0 — # m ■ # — #
#^
morrow, Dawning bright,will cheer thee with its rays. Hoping on, pressing on. Of his love, sweetly
bowers,Wheretheflow'rsof pleasure ne'er decay. hoping on, pressing on, of his love
M*^
^
i
M-'~f-f-
i
i
ttti
*
¥m
■
i
FF*
V-V—V
W-
*
A
£
&r=m
*?
22
# r*^
^-.
0 P--^—0 ■—
sing, ., . Hoping on, , . pressing on, . To the cross, . ., firmlv cling. j$ .
sweetly sing, hoping on, pressing on, ^ i^ to the cross, y \ nrmly cling.
^=m^m
3. Murmur not, my soul, tho' here in sadness,
Thou shalt linger yet awhile below,
Thou shalt soon rest evermore in gladness,
Where tke streams of joy forever flow. — Chorus.
4. Murmur not, my soul, for God has told thee
There are mansions ready for thee there,
Where the arms of Jesus shalt enfold thee,
And his glory freely thou shalt share. — Chorus.
THE PRECIOUS BLOOD OF JESUS.
P
^
J-
90
rXMr
3
*=z
T
*
-&-
f
1. Jesus, thy love shall we forget, And never bring to mind The grace that paid our hopeless debt, And
^Fffi
Wt
9~r*
f
±=±
Chorus.
i
^5^
3±£
^
^s-
bade us par -don find? O, the blood, 0,the blood, That Je - sus shed for me, That
precious blood, precious blood,
1
>
■-■>
m
-»■•-*-*-
I
*p*=*
fff
^ — f ' p ?
^
¥—^~
V— V-
?
«b±
E
^*
§fe
blood can make the foulest clean, That blood avail'd for me.
2. Gethsemane ran we forget ;
Thy struggling agony —
"When night lay dark on Olivet,
And none to watch with thee?-
-Cho.
S^T
±
f
T
3. Can we the plaited crown forget,
The buffeting and shame,
"When hell thy sinking soul beset,
And earth reviled thv name ? — Cho.
4. The nails — the spear — can we forget;
The agonizing cry —
" My God ! my Father ! wilt thou let
Thy Son forsaken die?"— Cho.
5. Life's brightest joys we may forget —
Our kindred cease to love ;
But he who paid onr hopeless debt,
Our constancy shall prove. — Cho.
lOO
0, STEER MY BARK.
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
LW
2
L O, I have roamed thro' many lands, A stranger to delight,
Not friendship's hopes, nor love's sweet smiles, Could Orn it. . . make my pathway bright, Till on the sky a star Lit
as
£E£:
H h — I F-
FTTT
ff
^=pc
rr
s?m
-i — h
%=%
E^^Sp
W- U
#-!■-#■
mrt
-I ! 1 (—
i^
Jc
0 — m— S — «-
# — # — * — #
j
%m
s?\
i
Chorus.
^e^S
^
SE
*=«
■*»-#
■«— <
ttffTOf
up night's sa-ble dome ; O, steer my bark by that bright star, For heaven is my home ; Home, Home, .
sable dome , Home, blessed home, O home, blessed home, Q
m
t=t=
•s — »
p&
-#— # — p-
1 ,1111
v-v-
0—0—0—0-
iz±
P—0—0—0-
-0—\ i (-
FF
-i 1 — i — *—r&
-I — H — l I— l-^
r— br-r
r-trt
1
0—0-0-
& <~+ -0—0-0-9- -»
I 1 — I 1 f—
I — i^-bM— r~
#_*_*
■#■■*■
-i — h
rtrw
P
=£
nrrr r^i i rrc-f-f
Home of the blest so fair, Home, Home,
yes, so fair, Home, bles-sed home, O home, blessed home,
Guide me, my Sa - viour, there.
^
^C=!
*N
£S3
r f'fr
£
-0 — 0-
££
-rr*-
-^— r—F-r— r| 1 1 F
nrmrt
FFpS
i=H
IN THE CROSS.
Fine. Chorus, i
101
t=x
J.
■*— r^
tU
i
A
*£=£=*
-8~*
3E
-V
H-
•# — #— # — i-
I 1 1 — 0-
-0 0—0 — 0-
-= — 0-
0—0-
-0
-0-
-0-
-0-
\j -9- - y - w -" i y
j /Drooping souls no longer grieve ; Heaven is propitious; ) In the cross, in
' \ If in Je-susyou believe, You will find him precious. / •
z>. c.
the cross, May we glo. - ry ev - er,
T**
-&'
Sm=v— f— * -^
1—0-0-
, 1 —
*=^C
Z>. C. Till our raptured souls shall find, Rest beyond the river.
t— V
2. Lo ! he now is passing by,
Calls the mourner to him :
He has died that you and I,
Might look up and view him.
3. Though your sins like mountains high,
Rise and reach to heaven ;
When your heart on him relies,
"AH shall be forgiven."
4. See the living waters move,
For the sick and dying ;
Now resolve to gain his love,
Or to perish trying.
5. Streaming mercy, how it flows,
Now I know I feel it;
Half has never yet been told,
Yet I want to tell it.
6. Jesus' blood has healed my wounds,
Oh ! the wondrous story ;
I was lost, but now am found,
Glory ! Glory ! Glory !
7. Glory to my Saviour's name,
Saints are bound to love him ;
Mourners, you may do the same,
Only come and prove him.
2
A'
+
8. Hasten to the Saviour's blood,
Feel it and declare it ;
Oh ! that I could sing so loud,
All the world might hear it.
9. If no greater joys are known
In the upper region ;
I will try to travel on
In this pure religion.
10. Heaven's here, and heaven's there,
Glory's here and yonder;
Brightest seraphs shout, amen.
While the angels wonder.
O, heaven is my home of rest,
I long to reach its shore ;
To throw these troubles from my heart,
To weep and sigh no more,
I long for that bright land,
Where I no more shall roam,
O, steer my bark o'er Jordan's waves,
For heaven is my home. — Chorus.
Concluded from opposite page.
3. O, take me from this world of woe,
To my blest home above ;
Where tears of sorrow never flow —
Where all the air is love ;
My loved ones wait for me,
My Saviour bids me come,
O, steer my bark to that fair land;
For heaven is mv home. — Chorus.
103
Words by Mrs. P. Palmeb.
WELCOME HOME.
From "Guide to Holiness." By permission.
i
9=
■4-i
N^#a
3
#
5*
q
M
fea
-&-
Music by Mrs. Knapp.
^=i=^
^m
1. Oh, when I shall sweep thro' the gates, The scenes of mor-tal - i - ty o'er, What then for my spir-it a-waits?
2. When from Cal-v'ry'smountI a - rise, And pass through the portals above, Will shouts, Welcome home to the skies,
£
£
t:
&B
£*=*±££
E
1
BE
«
:£
zfet
iffi:
F
/-
*
fr
^Z7§
F
N-
* — »
*
N:
r
Chorus.
vv
J _0lFh J
^
2^
"Will they sing on the glo - ri - fied shore. Wel-come home ! "Wel-come home !
Re - sound through the re - gions of love? Welcome home! Welcome home!
§1
P^
f r % t-t-jg:
TZ-
r
s=s
rrr r
-^
t=«5
I
i
25*
Q3
*P*
T^
^
-^
53
^
^
S
V
JE333EI
^
welcome in glo - ry for me ; Welcome home ! Welcome home ! A wel - come for me.
Welcome home! Welcome home! Welcome nome!
r rrr
r 1 FFT^v^t]8
^
F£
£vf^-
^h*
V — V
Yes ! loved ones who knew me below,
Who learned the new song with me here,
In chorus will hail me, I know,
And welcome me home with good cheer !
Welcome home, etc.
The beautiful gates will unfold
The home of the hlood-washed I'll see,
The city of saints I'll behold !
For O ! there's a welcome for me !
Welcome home, etc.
A sinner made whiter than snow,
I'll join in the mighty acclaim,
And shout through the gates as I go,
Salvation to (iod and the Lamb!
Welcome home, etc.
CHILDREN OF ZION.
$
Duet.
£
:£
10?
Arranged for this Work.
$
N-r
-H J. H
:2:
v
^-
^
£*
*
ehr-j
-9-
1. Children of Zi - on ! what harp notes are ringing, So soft o'er the sens - es, so sooth-ing • ly
4=tM
sweet ! Tis the music of an-gels, their rapture re-veal-ing, That you have been brought to the Holy One's feet.
Full Chorus
N—N
z
i
7
*-*■
fe^
3=~N *T~5
N— a-
Children of Zi - on, our hearts bid you welcome, Till we meet where the foe shall oppress you no more,
s
A P±— * 1 0 — 0-
-#- -#-
■t-^-
?cq£
£
y—v-
H5"
«
±— '?— V
^s
ft
y p p
y— ^
t— b b '111
p
,!
x
zfcit
-N— fv
tt
-p-F -=f=-a=^- =* — n— &— &- - rJ J
n
>-fr
f
Children of Zi - on, oh, welcome, thrice welcome, Till we all meet a - gain on that beau-ti - ful shore.
s=c
ft
-#- -#--#- -*-
v— /-
^rrrf*,f f--r.Tr
¥f
-p — *— v-\
Y^
*—r
£
«
p=^-«-
rr
?=^
f
r
2. Children of Zion, no longer in sadness
Refrain from tlio feast that your Saviour hath given;
Come, taste of the cop of salvation with gladness,
And think of the bau4i t still sweeter in heaven.
3. Children of Zion, we joyfully hail you,
Who've entered the sheepfold through Jesus the door,
While pilgrims on earth, though the fire a«<ail you,
Press forward, and soon will the conflict be o'er.
104
Words arranged
Moderate.
a
>N
— k\ J ^
THE CLEANS! NG FOUNTAIN.
"V
J=Z
-N— ^
i
Music by Rev. I. Baltzeix.
i N
W~v JhgT»
^:
5
^
2=*
s:
*=*=*!*t2=£^
+±^2
1. There's a fountain, a fountain of cleansing for sin, Where the guilty may wash and he clean ; Tho' transgression without and po-
2. O, this ev-er bless'd fountain by faith now I see, I am guided by faith from above ; I have bath'd my poor soul in its
cm
lu-tion within, They are lost in its health-giving stream. Sinner, come and bathe your souls to-day, Ere the
wa - ters s free, And am sav'd thro' omnip - o - tent love. Sinner, come, etc. yes , to-day,
¥
v — &-
r
v—v-
w \j if \j—v-\-p
£
5&
K- h N
1
tX\
>
4s— Pv
r^=*
^^tn
i
^
35t
#i~g^
y* — » — « — <r
heal - ing wa-ters cease to flow, Je-sus calls you, sinner, come
-■J--
fTtt
f * *
t
&r^-*r^*
a - way, He will wash you white as snow,
come a-way,
^SS
l
s
it
» 'T
V P \ i> \J V
Oh, this wonderful fountain, I'll sing of its fame,
Of the power of its life-giving stream;
And the glory ascribe unto Jesus, blest name,
So mighty from sin to redeem. — Chorus.
V V ■
£
fy
I " —
Then forever at home in that beautiful land,
With the blood-washed so holy and clean ;
Will we sing tbe new song 'mid the angelic band,
For this fountain once opened for sin. — Chorus.
Prom GOODLY PEASLS. by per.
mm
COME TO THE SAVIOUR.
k ft J — I
Music bv Fred. B. Schklt,.
105
• Pj— ■ ^ — i -
-&-
^5
1. O come, bring your hearts to Je- bus, For youth, like a ten- tier flow'r, Requires his pro-tect-ing
2. How love- ly the dewy morning, When earth seems all bright and fair; But brighter the morning
tm
-+—+—-+-
■*?-
r~r
#fer*
-*-?-
-0-
*
-0-+J—0-
w'-w.
f
A
I
9^=*
J J
V Z !
Chorus.
love and care, To shield in temp-ta- tion's hour,
time of life, When hallowed by faith and pray'r.
It JL + +.-*.+
Come, come, come to the Saviour
Come, in your youthful days; Light "is the bur- den he bestows, And pleasant are all his ways.
&&. . 0 0.*-0 0 0 0 7t 0 _#-•_# — 0 m—rSi—P-
Q. — # 0- ' 0—0
■4—
-^
<?
-0 ' 0
J S
-
1 lr
'■S-s-
*
p<?-
IE
3 The song-birds their praises marble
In forest, on hill, and plain ;
But sweeter the songs of joy we raise,
To Jesus, for sinners slain. — Cho.
4 Then praises to Cod we'll render ;
In songs let our voices swell !
He gives to his children joy and peace,
And with them delights to dwell. — Cho.
106
Moderate.
GOOD NEWS COMES O'ER THE SEA.
(MISSIONARY.) Words and Music by Rev. L BaltzelL.
i
a=s
i
Good news comes o'er the sea, And tells of vic-t'ry there ; The heathen bow the knee, In
The glorious gos - pel light, In splendor shines to day, Where naught but darkest night Fell
M3
££
££
i
£
-b^-h 0-
-9- -»-
-^-»
i
I35EB
tr
f
-P— P-
1TT
£
rt — 1 — £
-fr— i-
£
=i:
5
A-
Si
— I-
,N-
H-
3*-»
w—w—w
±
•# — #— *-
hum - ble, fer - vent pray'r. Long wait - ed we to hear The glorious tid-ings come, Pro
on the heathen's way. Brave Christians heard the cry That came a-cross the
-P * = P-r-T
sea, " Come,
«^
■V »
t~ ±
-9-f:
Chorus. Iwe^.
Bfc
-*-*
f
^
*
r— f
-.
claiming vict'ry there, Where darkness reign'd alone. Re-joice, .... re-joice, . . . Good
help us, ere we die, Come, help us to be free." Re-joice, re-joice, re -joice, re-joice,
-£-£-
±=t
~* — E
£=t
GOOD NEWS COMES O'ER THE SEA -Concluded.
107
=r
±
j-
*^
Repeat Chorus.
IE*
T
;£
rr
t~t
Z*T
T i u I
news comes o'er the sea ; . . . . Re - joice, ... re • joice, . . . Good news comes o'er the sea.
the sea; Re -joice, re-joice, re- joice. re-joice,
-0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0~ -0- -#- 2"1 -#- —
— 0 ■ L — t— ri 1 1 0 i 0 0 — F 0—1-0 0 — P P i 0 0 — I P
tzztzlt
t
0 — 0-
i
H (-
V-
-?t— P-
They bade adieu to home,
To friends and loved ones dear ;
They crossed the ocean's loam,
They landed safely there.
They raised the banner bright
On Afric's hostilj shore,
The heathen saw a light,
Where darkness reigned before.
Rejoice, etc.
rrr-f
Oh, see them coming home!
The poor, degraded race !
The Master bids them come
To seek his saving grace.
At Jesus' feet they fall ;
To heaven they lift their cry ;
He hears their simple call, —
He saves them ere they die.
Rejoice, etc.
t-
-P— P-
Awake ! the sun is high ;
The Master's calling you !
Why stand ye idly by ?
There's work for you to do!
Your treasures, prayers, and tears,
Go, lay at Jesus' feet;
And soon we'll sing the song
Of victory complete.
Rejoice, etc.
THE SAVIOUR CALLS.
. is I l
£
*
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
>-
»
PUP
T
Jt—lh
1=^
*—&-
5
1. To - day the Sa - viour calls, Come, children, come, Oh, ten - dor, youth-ful souls, Why long-er roam.
2. To - day the Sa - viour calls, Oh, lis -ten now, With - in these * sa - ered walls, To Je - sua how.
3. To - day the Sa - viour calls; For refuge fly; Be - fore his justice falls; Come, death is nigh.
msmmmm
r-z
-p—
m
b=£
<5>
t
1
108
THE WAY TO BE HAPPY.
s ^ ^-
I
£
t
Newly arranged by Rev. L Baltzell.
N.I* I
:*=£
£
<*— *
I
-# #=
-I— »
if-fii
s=i=*
* N*
1. We nev - er shall be hap - py if we walk the ways of sin, 'Tisa path that leads onward to sor-row, )
If the right we would pursue, it is time we should begin ; For why need we wait for to-mor-row. J
Wi
bfe
£
-0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- ■#-
-I 1 H — h — la U — la P-
^
lg
^^-V^r-^-t frt t F~t'
■v—v—v—v-
^^
^F
Chorus.
fv-fc
rv-fe
J 1 1
i=M
+. — j%
-# — a±—m — a — -i — J— -
3^o
-0^—0—0-
5
f
2
Let us seek sal - va - tion to - day,
. . . Let
Yes, to - day,
-#>.-#■ -0- ■#■•
us seek sal - va - tion to - day, ... If the
Yes, to - day,
■0j 0 _ -f- -0- -f- -0- &
crown we would se - cure, We must make our call - ing sure, And seek sal
m.
£
-t
^^
g#E#iEi#i=i
f
H
i
t^s
^Ml
2. We'll never get to heaven if we do not learn the way,
And prepare for the journey before us;
If for Jesus we would live, we must always watch and pray,
And thus will his banner be o'er us. — Qio.
t
The tempter may assail us, but with Jesus by our side,
And a hope in his power possessing,
We will make his holy word still our counsel and our guide,
And count every trial a blessing.— CAo.
GENTLE JESUS.
109
m
s
-%3L
I. 1
£±5
fete
sus, Sa - viour mild, Hear
1 —
*s
E
low
P=P-
t=4=
ly sup -pliant child; Nothing bring I to thy
-I-
^-g— p
#-«
«
^rf=*
5
^E3
I
feet — Naught for thine ac-cept
£b£
r— r
£=
meet — But a
jl3.
soul
for sin dis - tress'd
Gen - tie
£
-h
i
m
t±
i
*±
*±
*
3=S=
"I 1-
-=^
i
Je - sus, give it rest ;
But
soul for sin dis-tress'd; Gen - tie
-v-
.-. -JL. -p.
i: as~. - — tx~
sus, give
it
i5
SES=t
■»*-
£
•2. In this weary vale below,
Thou hast trod the path of woe;
Thou hast known the dreadful power
Of the tempter's evil hour,
Felt the pangs of grief and fear,
Shed, like us, the bitter tear.
1 — h
3. Now T bend before thy throne,
All my guilt and foil j own ;
Yea, with earnest heart I plead,
Comfort — pardon— in my need.
This my plea, and naught beside,
Gentle Jesus, thou hast died. .
ir
i
110
Spirited.
4-4-4
O.ALL YE PEOPLE. (Anthem.)
Arranged for this Work.
/7\
i
?m£&
PS=3
fcl
<7 #-
^ — ii" — i-
#— ^*
1.0, all ye people God hath made! Sing glo-ry to his ho - ly name ; To him be endless honors paid, Let
2. O, sing his praise, ye heav'nly choirs, Who stand a - round his awful throne, Repeat, on your im-mor - tal lyres, That
tA
--^-jE
?—*—*
-t= — ^
m — n— *-
=?-
rf
W
1 — r — i — w= f r i > \— *-±
f=f
f
f
«— fr
'I — ["r-r-1-! 1
r
^N
Chorus.
ev' - ry tonguo his praise proclaim. Praise to the Lord, who all things made, Praise to the Lord, who all things made, And
>raise be - long to him a - lone. Praise to the Lord, etc.
,4-4
acf:
S&&S
*
V— *— <2-
L
T
■&
V—t-
—t
£
-la H
S?
£
5-P-
-3-=4-
s
£S
*hs-#
fes
t
glo - ry to his ho - ly name ; To him be end - less honors paid, Let ev' - ry tongue his praise proclaim.
Glo - ry, etc. ^ ^ To him, etc.
-#- -0-0-0-0- m -+- -p-+~ -0- -0- -0- Ts
^
Glo - ry, etc. ^ ^
:u-b-U-bz:r— r— 1=
f3
-s-m
*§
±z±
E
Ff
E
M
*£
V
t
m
CLING TO THE SAVIOUR.
4-
-d m 1
+—&
1
TinA
111
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
.fs fr [yJLJ^-Ai-^M^MV-! rr
at
•*-
1. I lay my sins on Je -sus, The spotless Lamb of God ; He bears them all, and frees us From the accursed load, >
I bring my guilt to Je -sus, To wash my crimson stains White, in his blood most precious, Till not aspot remains./
2.1 long to be like Je- sus, Meek, loving, lowly.mild; I long to be like Jesus, The Father's ho- ly Child,)
I long to be with Je-sus, Amid the heav'nly throng, To sing with saints and angels, The everlasting song. J
Chorus.
fc=S!
^-*
4^
*7~*
r*
*—d-^~ d d. d ^r- h
_v
H
Ej
t
*
Oh, cMng to the Saviour, Oh, cling to the Saviour, Oh, cling to the Saviour, He's mighty to save.
--£-
XL
#^-£
E
srw-
¥—?■
it
m?
-* — • — p-
-**-*-
•
V— +
l ^T-#
tLzdp
-v-t
r
k ?
Concluded from opposite page.
3. Thou glorious sun, his image bright,
Who rul'st the seasons and the days,
And thou, fair moon, who rul'st the night,
Unite in your Creator's praise.
4. Praise him, ye stars, whose trembling lights,
Like scatter'd pearls, adorn the sky;
Your silent course each heart invites,
To praise the Lord who reigns on high.
5. Praise him, ye founts, ye limpid streams,
Ye rapid rivers in your course,
Proclaim him in your murm'ring themes,
Of every good th' exhaustless source.
6. O thou, for whom this wondrous frame,
And all these creatures were design'd,
O man ! adore and praise his name
In whom all beauties are combin'd.
lis
Boldly.
fe^
ON TO VICTORY.
I
\ & -0 — *r
SU
M
Arranged with Chorus.
I . l. Is l i
A3z=£z£sE£
EtsEzJ
3
2±
*' 4 #
:eizB
^g-g- 8— ^— ^
f— *— gJ-
Soldiers,for whom the Saviour bled, On in your Captain's footsteps tread ; Follow your Master, and be led On to victo
bzk
J
-»• a>-
F
t
22.
t
FHi-r
a*
^— f
:4=E
'-f^fi-*—*~
1 — t^ — ^— r — t
i— r
£=jfc
r
ry. See, how the foe-men take the ground,Hark, how the signal trumpets sound, List how the accents pour around,
-f^-
*
«H
+=»-
V— V
«
1— r
.pzqfc.
dM
Chorus.
—+■
§-«-=- —
3±
-^
1— tr
5z£
*f
► — 5>
*?
agzzzzzzz^ZFzSzjfazzzzzzzzz_^_JS|_^==gzzizz,
N-fc
i?>d-«
£
^
Cheering melo - dy. Then a wake, ye freemen true, On to du - - ty, glad and
Then a-wake, ye freemen true, Then awake ye freemen true, On to duty, glad and free, On to
f-m -0- -0- -0-'~0-
J:
*f^
%
g-e
«t«
«-F-
Of/ TO VICTORY, -Concluded,
113
free, There's a glo - - rious crown for you, When you gain the vic-to - ry.
duty, glad and free, There's a glorious crown for you, There's "a glorious crown for you When you gain the victory, victory.
2. Soldiers, come, hasten on with me,
Soon soon your enemies must flee;
Youi great reward before you see
Shining from on high,
Come, boldjy take the glorious field ,
You may he slain — but never yield;
You shall inscribe upon your shield,
" Victory, though I die." — Chorus.
8. By all the ransom which Tie gave,
By his lull triumph o'er the grave,
Trust in his mighty power to save,
Fi<rm and faithful be;
And when the last dark hour :' wgh,
When the great tear-drop d-:^is the eye,
You shall in death's last parting sigh,
Grasp the victory. — Chorus.
LEAD THOU ME.
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
1. When the day of life is brightest, Love the fondest hope most free, A nd the step of time beat lightest, O, my Father, lead thou me.
2. Whenthe night of life is darkest, And my soul shall tempted be, When to sorrow's voice I listen, O, my Father, leadthonme.
EEF
CB2
U-
^
^rqE
trig: 0 yxrzt i# Viy- * J>=p^=
£:
I
* W
e±
£=£
W
4-v_^.
jfc
W-W-
trfr
3. Be life's pathway smooth or stony,
Let my faith still cling to thee;
Be life's future bright or stormy ;
0, my Father, lead thou me.
k-
r
V-t^-V-
v-
w
-r-i/
-i — t-
4. When the day of life is over,
And my journey's end I see ;
Into joy and bliss eternal,
O, my Father, lead thou me.
114
CHILDREN'S KINGDOM
k&rtW-mm&mifeft
ft ores arm masic by inty. 1. Aaioskx.
SEEEil
fc
-A-
E^E3
1. There'e a glorious Kingdom, ev-er bright and fair,Many lit-tle children live up
2. In that glorious Kingdom in the up-per fold-See the children playing harps of
there ; In that gionous Kingdom
gold .Making sweetest niu - sic
q. 2 ft-¥—^i * I* f|I I I i t ll » — U— W— '> — =ct£:
5
*
ER-C-C-eg
TM^-^-^-b
si
»
s
£
&£=£
Otiorus.
H.p
py
ohll
dien,
*¥
3t
J j i j w1-£=£=}±=*=3&—ii jU
rrrr
is a throne of gold.All are bright and hap - py —bliss un - iclu. ) tT ,if tlo
with the an- gel band ; All before the gold - en throne they stand, j £iaPPy ai " ue
^H
IMF*
4 — S — 8-
£=*
U> j, ^ ^ fy ^
children, in that Kingdom fair,
«=«=«
i
^m
h*p
call
dren.Yoa
mast
love
the Sa
*
Tiour
i
true.
i
-4>H-# # 0 0 0-
*±4
0—0—0—0—t — !*-*-#-
-F — F — F — F — F F-1-* — 0 — 0 — 0 H^ — \J — \jf — b — P- Y—^-0—0—0—0—m-3-0—0—0—0—r — F-
i t » i j \f $ v b b & tf tf b b i> bbbb b b b b ^
Singing, ever singing, Songs of triumph there; If you would be happyin thatKingdom too.You must love the Saviour true.
rrr
uuivm^&Em
^"— • — i — T^-
F?
GATHER THE LITTLE ONES IN.
115
Music by Rkt. I. Raltkll.
•; y v y \S
-^-J-^-XJV-? j 1 J . ,
^ppi
5
^f=l
\J V [j
±
1. Go to the hedges and broad high way, Gather the little ones in;
rrr-rrr.r r ♦• * #■ a* ** "~
SI
^
^ k 1^
Hasten ! the Saviour's command obey,
H
e
* — »-
»==»
BS
1^ 1> U U/ tr
£=£
^ fe fe V V V I
Ff=r
V l> l> V l> v
Pi
^
?
p
5
i
Chorus.
^=j=i
h=±
tt
£=£
-§ — » 1 1 -« — >
5=
k ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ,
Gather the little ones in.
V V V *
G&ih er,
gath er,
Gather them in, let the room be full, Gather the little ones
in;
&
£3
*-
p=£
E
^
rtrrrr
r r r
r i rjr-£=g=fc
^
e
y k ^ k v-y
l> 1> V E
v~v~y~v~v~v
i
£
r, r r r r
j
Oath
-#-^-
J.
S3
£
9:
P P ? * ' 5r— I P i/
er, gatb er,
Gather them in-to the Sunday-School, Gath
^j T r
^ ^ k k ■
er the little ones in.
^S
F
-# — #-
b l> v y y y
pn u y y • &
Gather them in from the lane'and street,
Gather the little ones in ;
Gather thein in with your so^gs so sweet,
Gather the little ones in. — C7wrw,
EEE^r^
2. Gather them in from the dreary home
Gather the little ones in ;
Jesus has bidden them all to come,
Gather the little ones in. — Chorut.
3. Gather them in, both the rich and poor
Gather the little ones in •
Open to all, is the Gospel door.
Gather the little ones in. — Chorus.
5. Gather them in with a glowing love,
Gather the little ones in ;
Lead them along to the home above,
Gather the little ones In. — Chorui.
116
THROW OPEN THE GATES AFAR.
m
Words and Melody by E. A. Hoffman.
fcz
S
£
t)
ft
Harmonized by T. C. O'Xane.
-K— N is
=3=?
-0-
R--
My
The
My
My
treasures are gath - er - ing yon - der, I am loos-ing my hold on the
i - dols once lov'd are all bro - ken, And the cords that have bound me are
spir - it is grow-ing world-wea - ry, For the vis - ion of Heaven ap
life is now siow-ly re - ced - ing, And the death-an - gel stands at the
s+t
-0-
-#-
atr.fi:
fcfcft
5
V
r^r$
f
%
earth, The
riv'n ; My
pears, Where
door. The
£e£
-m v-
1—r
"N
-i P 1 1 \— $ P H-J 1 \
tv-fr
m
Chorus.
SB
I
— i-
i--*
-0 — #-
Saviour is gently pre -par -ing, My soul for its heav'nly birth;)
spir - it is pluming its pinions For its beau-ti - ful home in Heav'n. J
eves wi.1 „„ ionge, be tear - , As here, through the .ong, sad vears ; |
glo - ri - fied loved ones are wait - ing To welcome me to yon shore.
I am coming, O glo-ri-fied
I am coming, etc.
—0—P
-*- f—P-
*^f*
fc
lov'd ones, Throw open the gates a - far, (a-far), I am com-ing to be where my Je - sus And the
IN [N IN -0- -0-
.0. ,-t-J— 4— J- f~ T-t-t P—P P—P~rP V P P *-—P—flP——P-
J
-y—v—v-
p—p — 0—p ^-j^i-p-A- 0— ?—&-*- — * — j~ y .
THROW OPEN THE GATES A F A R.-Concluded.
117
beau-ti-ful an-gels are,
lam comma: to be where mv Je - sus Ami the beau-ti-ful an-gels are.
■t-t—fi—P-
m.
n
W^W-
tt
X
a
^_^_
-^—f-.jjt-i-*
¥-W=^W-
y=&
JESUS.
■#— r*-
t*
# i—7—i Jr-tar- -• — # — »— » — •
i
Music by J. K. COLE.
8=
^:
OCTO
£
-^-*
+r.
R h N
rfm*
ST*" ^
i
Je - sus, Let us bless his name, For to seek and save us To our world he came.
Je - sus, He will hear our cry, And will send to help us From his throne on high.
1. Let us sing to
2. Let us pray to
3. Let us all love Je - sus, For he lov'd us so, That he died to save us From our sin and wee.
Chorus.
3e33eJ
it
■*r-K
6
-*-=•-
*
T?
i
^:
&-
£
N
g: j. g:
s
-*-&=£
IEE
3^:
-^
i
Je - sus is our Saviour, And his name we'll praise, Let us love and serve him, In our youthful days.
-W S ri^,— E-tr-— L i 1 — nrT-VHrT-^-rH -•-£---
HS;
«=^
-hk — £
f
-h — k—
^
*-=*
r
118
Words by Rev. W. H. Burrell.
COME TO JESUS.
iSSES^if
±£
Music and Chorus by Rev. J. H. Stockm*. 7
Arranged by Wm. G. Fischer.
+
7-
±
^3
*
qp
#
Jej
-5-
4^^ »'*
^— 9
0 — *-
*4-ii' *
1. Come,wand'rer,come, retrace thy stepsjn sin no longer roam ; Thy Father calls,with pleading voice,Come home.dear child,conie
gpS
U
w=w
€5-1-
£
J2i .*-
?— p=^
B*^
V P -0-
1 — fcr
i — r
Chorus.
— N
s
+
^
ST
E
75fr*
5
a
*«^
i-S
^r
-#-#
j*-^*^» 4 -fe ' — *
3»i
Come to Je-sus, Come to Je-sus, Come to Je - sus now ! He will save you, He will save you, He will save you now.
* * -0
UA
it5=t
■P*
«f4
P-m-
P^h*
ss
i
baU
m
4&-
FS
-©-£-
W=W
■©^
2. Though grieved and wounded by thy sin,
His mercies o'er thee yearn,
His spirit longs and groans within,
To hail thy safe return.
3. Lo ! all these years he's sought in vain
To win thy heart to peace ;
Oh, come thou back, from sin refrain,
And let thy wand'ring cease.
4. "The fatted calf" shall then be slain.
And music charm thine ear ;
Thy Father's house shall joy again,
And heaven thy welcome cheer.
Words by Rev. W. H. Burrell.
THE SUNDAY-SCHOOL SHIP.
Music by Asa Hull.
1. The Sun-day-school ship, with her sails all unfurl'd, Is head-ingfor glo - ry, that beau-ti - ful world;
2. How grand-ly she rides on the crest of the waves, As proud-ly the storms and the tempests she braves ;
£4
§
mmm
p * - p
^~
E
ft
N
V— V
v=v-
m
v~t
£
3=
~S* -±L
THE SUNDAY-SCHOOL SH I P -Concluded.
is
=t
— i-
-J-
■**-
— N-
119
0
-K-
=*
I
Where Je-sus is waiting with crowns of pure gold, To place on each brow as they en-ter the fold.
The ev -ergreen shore, now ap-pear-ing in view, How joy-ousand hap-py our strong youthful crew.
^m
-?-
t±f=£
t
-PL
^Ljl_A_,
c
*■
Jf
t
-P»-
I?
-■#-
i
=,
Chorus.
v
hi *x:im
=t
-4-
£
5r
Oh,
-ij-ii m » p
the voyage to
glo-ry is pleas-ant and free, How sweet-ly
-pt
we
ride on the wave ;
5n*to K-
rr\
=£
F
e
-0-
■r
0-
V
m
Young sail-ors are we, with Je-sus at sea, We'll trust in our Captain, He's mighty to save.
rvg. flu
— -
*
V
9
.0.
0-
-rr-
E=£
P*
t
/^
S
3. Now, gathered on deck, with their notes of sweet song,
Both teachers and children, ;i glorious throng,
They spy in the distance, the city's high dome,
Where soon they shall dwell with their lov'd ones at home.
4. Awaiting them there, in that sweet Eden land.
Companions and friends, in multitudes stand,
Now, reaching the poit in the regions of light,
In songs of sweet praises, with joy all unite.
120
Lively.
ANCHOR BY AND BY.
m
±
Arranged with Chorus by T. C. O'EAiTfc.
±
Mv
i
m
u
2
«±
•<e-=
1
#- »-#
r--^
can read my ti-tle clear, When I can read my title clear, When I can read my title
1 i ti • tie clear, tl • tie clear,
I I'll bid farewell to ev'-ry fear, I'll bid farewell to ev'-ry fear, I'll bid farewell to ev'-ry
ev'- ry fear, ev'- ry fear,
ES
tt i Ju
ft
_P- -ft--*--*- +.
-*--f*-
I
fc=Sr±
firttrftt
*-
i
V-V
n
-#— p—p-
HP -IP-
PS
y— V
i — v-v-
■j — ^ V V
p
Chorus.
n
fe*
rV-K
i
i
i
t
ra^TP
:fc2
5
clear To mansions in the skies, ) We will stand the storm, We will an - chor by and
fear, And wipe my Weeping eyes, j We will stand, stand the storm, It will not be very long ; We will anchor by and by, We will
fftiff-V'tifyMff.fflff
by, by and by, We will stand the storm, We will anchor by and by,
an - chor by and by, We will stand, stand the storm; It will not be ve • ry long, We will an - chor by and by, by and by
-»-
-P_ -P_ -P- -p.
££
:U^-U
2. Should earth against my soul engage,
And fiery darts be hurl'd,
Then I can smile at Satan's rage,
And face a frowning world.
$33
t
-!=— — b
£Si
¥mrrm
*-^z-
/^
*£•
i^S=S
3. Let cares like a wild deluge come,
Let storms of sorrow fall, —
So I but safely reach my home,
My God, my heaven, my all.
4. There I shall bathe my weary soul
In seas of heavenly rest,
And not a wave of trouble roll
Across my peaceful breast.
THE BLIND BOY.
i
Recitative.
T\
JJLN I— h^jH
-9
-F\-
9
a'
was
-9-
-9-
'W
ifciS
^
3
i=S
:*=£:
/T\
121
Arranged by Rev. T. Baltzeli*
A4
9
:9~
99
B
-H 1 1— =— -1 1
9—9—9 — y—9- -# —
9—9-9-
1
# 9
It was a pleasant summer day, The flow'rets bloomed, the air was mild, The lit -tie birds p>ured forth their lays
I11 pleasant thought I wandered on, Be-neath the green leaf 'sample shade, Till sudden-ly I came up-on
And
Two
%
ev'-rything in na-ture
children that had hither
-9
-#■
smiled, The lit - tie birds poured forth their lays, And everything in nature smiled,
strayed, Till suddenly, Ac. rT\
rr> A- *-
*- #-
_M.
\
HP
r
-t/-
f-r
1
F^
-p— #
I"
£
3. Just at an aged birch tree's foot
A little boy and girl reclined;
His hand in hers he kindly put.
And then I saw the boy was blind.
4. " Dear Mary," said the poor blind boy,
"That little bird sings very long;
Say, do you see him in his joy,
And is he pretty as his song?"
5. " Yes, Eddie, dear," replied the maid,
"I see the bird on yonder tree;"
The poor boy sighed and gently said,
"Sister, I wish that I could see."
6. "The flowers, you say. are very fair.
And bright green leaves are on the trees!
And pretty birds are hopping there —
How beautiful fur one that sees.
7. Yet I the fragrant flowers can smell,
And I can feel the green leaf's shade,
And I can hear the notes that swell,
From thos;; dear birds that God has made.
8. So, sister, Crod to me is kind,
Though sight, alas! he has not given;
But tell me, are there any blind,
Among the children up in heaven?"
9. "No, Eddie, dear, there all can see:
But wherefore ask a thing so odd?"
"Oh, Mary, he's so good to me,
I thought I'd like to look at God."
10. "Oh, brother dear, the time draws nigb,
When we shall leave this world behind,
And dwell together up on high—"
" O, sister, then I wont be blind."
193
BEGIN TO PRAJ.
Music and Words by Rev. I. Baltzeli*
N~N— N
tet
I
N N N
S
1
I
J
3:
-»— rf-
hr
li
3t
III
3:
%—&
-g-
35
-^r
1. Now be -gin the heav'nly race, Christ calls to - day ; Come, and ear-ly seek his face, And learn to pray.
2. Hear the blessed Saviour say, " Come un - to me;" I will take your sins a - way, And make you free.
3. Je - sus speaks in accents mild, Come, come a - way; He will bless a lit - tie child, Come, come to - day.
JL. J0- J0- -0- J(L- -0- -ft. -ft- -0- -0- J0-.
0 — I 1 1 r-\ 1 0 — 1-# #-— 0 — r-f$> — r-0 — f f 1 r~\ 1 0 — •-• #-2 — 0-
He who left his Father's throne, He who made your grief his own, Calls you to his peaceful home, Far, far a - way.
Come, and seek the Saviour's face • Come, and seek his pard'ning grace, Now begin the heav'nly race. He waits for thee.
Come to him, let nought allure ; Come to him, your rest is sure ; He will save you ev - er-more In endless day.
5S
-0^-^0
3 1 f/
-0- -ft. -0. .0.1.-0. _ft
v—v—v—v-
u.^_fc/_r_.
.j0j!~m
H
V— ^ / \y
_^E— _fE— ~fP"
-I i -»-
-^-/*- A-
V-
r~«— S
+-W
V=&
V-
i
-0*-0-
tt
•&-
-&~\
I
Words by Rev.W. H. Burrell.
THE SUNDAY-SCHOOL ARMY.
Music by Asa Hull.
-0-' -0- "0-
-0- -0-' -0- -0- w -0- -J- -^-. -&■ -J- "*-" "*"
1. With ban - ner and song, we are marching a - long, The Sun-day-school ar - my, full ten thousand strong,
if: -0.
~9- -0-
*— f»
§
v-v-
£
w
X*
v=&
0 0——0—0 — r
> — W . >— y— b
ffl-f
THE SUNDAY-SCHOOL A R M Y -Concluded.
123
$
j-
o
•^4-
5±
^
To conquer the world, Our flag is unfurl'd, And " onward to vic-to-ry," Our mot - to and song.
->-
z: ^ in .,-. ^_
i 1 r~* +^-9-
■v—
■f-^-J-^^
v—v—v—v—v-
t=£
-?-
Chorus.
I \-
±
*=r
i
^
-Z5>-
-sHr-
J
"5*-
r
^-S
bill/
?^^
r r j u x>
We are march - ing, march - ing, We're march - ing, marching a - long.
March-ing, ruarch-ing, inarching, march-ing, The Sunday-school ar - my is marching a -long;
i 1 h 1 1 1 1 P y Is — L — 1= 1= \x-. — *= 1-
%-
f==9
I
±=t
-W—i W-
£=£
*-V
^
We are march - ing,
r
£
h r> j j 4- J i I J*— E-tt:
march
SSJfc
_**.
*=h
r u b
ing, The Sunday-school ar-my is marching a-long.
is march-ing a-long.
March-ing, marching, march-ing. marching, The Sunday-school ar - my
i*
£
trr~t
2. Our soldiers are brave, and our banner shall wave,
While onward we're inarching our lost race to save ;
The flag of the cross,
O'er th'enemies loss,
In grandeur, and glory, and triumph, shall wave. — Cho.
£
f
3. On life's golden shore, with our conflicts' all o'er,
Our arms we shall ground ; we shall need them no more,
There comrades shall meet,
Each other to greet,
And triumph together on Mfe's golden shore,— Cho.
124
"Words adapted.
ONLY ACROSS THE DARK RIVER.
ST-jisie by Rev. I. Baltzelt*
1. There's a beautiful land where the bright angels dwell, And our lov'd ones are gathered forever ; Whose songs of deliv'rance in
2. There's a heav'nly rest, there's a home of delight, Where sorrow and death cometh never, 'Tis the home of the holy, and
-*- - * - „ -P- ^ -f«- ■#- ■#■ -f«- -r«- :f! -f^
There's a crown and a robe in that beautiful land,
Which Jesus the glorious giver,
Shall bestow upon those who are worthy to stand,
It is only across the dark river. — Cko.
3. Then we'll fear not the darkness that hides that bright shore,
For the Lord shall be there to deliver ;
He will guide all safe to the bright evermore,
It is only across the dark river. — Cho.
Words by Eev. W. H. Burreix.
WAITING FOR ME.
Music by John R. Sweney. 1 S 5
Words Dy kev. w. a. bvrb.kl.lu vv n i i i /» \j i v '« »»« «- •
1 I am seek-ing my homo in the sky, A- way o - ver earth's troubled sea, In that beautiful world up-on
2 I am Eng-ing to* be with them there ; Those heaVnly mansions to see, In those regions so lovely and
. * — t -J w. i ■*■
i-^-*±
Where mv lov'd ones are waiting for me. They're waiting for me,
Where mVlov'd ones are waiting for me. They're waiting for me, etc.
' yes, are vrait - ing ior me,
They're waiting for me,
yes, are
ti\Vpe[ «
•_^_L| 1 ^
i
me, ^ In that land so pure and blest.In that land of peace and rest, They are waiting, yes, are waiting for me.
me,
wait - ing for me,
N N
^
•^ »• u L^ 1< T — C — u- u*-i 1 hy — 1 — : — I 1 1 . I- —
3. I am nearing the City of Gold,
[ta domi • i and lofty, I see;
With sweet rupture and joy i benold
My lov'd one* an waiting tor aae<- Om
<L O the bliss, O the transport I know,
From bondage and sin I am fin
While the blood-washed, with garments as snow,
/\nd my lov'd ones are„waitinjj tor me. — Cho.
19©
THERE'S WORK FOR ALL^ ,„.,.„ tB
Words and Music by Rev. I. BaltzelL
s
3=8:
E*
**
*
i
^
*^«
I
^T^-jd- *]%
■<5>-
1. Say not, 0 Chris -tian reap - er, fhe earth no har - vest yields ; Look up, and you'll dis - cov - er The
b£
(2
£:
4SL±-
F 1/ i — F— tFzFrti — trf— r— Lf
Chorus.
-^2-
SE
*F
-i — T ui — t-
waiting harvest fields, There's a work for you and me to do, A work, a work for ev' - ry one ; Then
work to do,
g=BSJE^^EJiiE^
£
^pfFrwm^
^=^-
■e^
T
fc
d
bltttf?^^
«
3fe
•<5>-
E
up, and on to du-ty go, Our work has scarce begun.
du - ty go,
Sj
E
2. Go forth with hope and courage,
Go, wield the sickle's blade;
Fear none of Satan's reapers,
Though well they be arrayed. — Cho.
3. How many youth and children
In this wide world of sin ;
How many men and women
Your industry may win. — Cho.
4. The autumn days are coming,
The summer will be o'er,
Among the ripened harvests
You'll find your work no more.— Cho.
5. But if, in faith, you labor,
And gather sheaves of grain,
^With joy you'll hail the Master,
When he shall come again. — Cho.
CLINGING TO THE ROGK.
127
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
Boldly
33
:4Ei:
23&3£
-.
3F3
1. When the tempest high is raging, As I sail o'er life's rough sea ; Wreck'd I be, I'll fear no bil - low,
-9- -0-
£=£
-ff- -a- -»-
-4-fr
:sr
¥=!*=*
■*- -P- -o- -0-
-0- -0-
r-r-r-r1-
■*-
-&-
T
i — r — r— r
£
j l—i-^—j-h-J 1 —
d J J * I #~ J-
T
=3h
3==3=r
- 1 !.#'#—
i — i — r
U
-*-
fc*
If I then may on-ly he, Clinging to the rock, clinging to the rock ; Clinging, clinging,
yes,
;• r r r rj^mB^-w-fcHr- ti r *ie> * e l * i
T
V— It
»
M±£j^aj±is IM Ihlf M fll f
clinging to the rock; Waiting for the boatman from the oth - er shore, Coming, coming for me
.*- -•.. ,_ •*- •*•• -#-• -0- -0- -£-• - „ . -*- -^- -f~ ,,,. i~ 0* S*
:t=
^^^^r^^^^^3^
g=^:£=fc=*3i
->-
^
— *-
2. If amid the wrecks I'm drifted,
Darkness settled thickly round,
Hope shall lift her gleaming beacon,
If I then be only found. — Chorus.
3. When the waves shall close around me,
Proudly round me as I die,
Over all these seeming victors,
I shall triumph while I cry.— Chorus.
128
Words and melody by P. A. Spurlock.
OH, SEE THEM NOW MARCHING.
Harmon 'zed by R. K. MoORE.
*U— M^
*=$=}
I h h L v 0—0-
EP
— f\-s
K-
f**-3f
*=^
1. Glad millions of children are marching to-day, In the east, in the west, on the prairie far a - way ;
2. A - way o'er the prairies wide roll-ing we see, 'Mid the waving of grass, like the bo - som of sea,
&m
£££
^T^-g-r
^=T .. rlT~Tir7=F=£-\ L w. S~g-WVl i • U~r-f^=F
eE
^~
£>
;— \
I
1r*~?
s-^s
-=i — « — ■-
■=5
i
On missions of nier - cy they march thro' tho land, The pride of our nations, the Sabbath-school band.
Little fai - ry-like forms gliding on o'er the way, To hail with glad greetings the Sabbath-school day.
3=
S«
-U — I
fe»rHa
P U i Pp ' P P i "
^n
■8-J-
Chorus.
tr
iii^
j
?
3=J:
MeIeeM
-fir-
:S:
Marching, marching, marching,
Oh, see them now marching, march-ing, marching, With songs on the way, on the way, on the way,
t
|j H | | Marching, marching, marching, L k T ^ "| / j/ J L k
j^^trtrx
OH, SEE THEM NOW MARCHING, -Concluded.
129
*
-H— j^-r P J ft ft— =1 — \ ft — ft 1-
£
3
^
>2fc#
Bound for the land where the an
gels are harping,
The ci - ty a-bove that is bright - er than day.
-v—v-
-v—v
v, —
-V
£
V 1
3. Away through the valleys, and over the hills,
Through woodlands they come, and by low gushing rills;
From the wide city full, midst the gathering throng,
With chiming of bells they come marching along.
V-
t
*i_^_i=£:
^s
— b
U=£
9-
v— ^
I
4. Like stars of the morning that herald the light,
Ere the sun cometh forth in the strength of his might,
With songs and with banner they march on the way,
Proclaiming the coming millennial day.
Words by Fanny Cbosby
LORD, ABIDE WITH ME.
By Per. of Biglow i Main.
4. Fill mc with thy love divine ;
Consecrate my life to thee;
Bend my stubborn will to thine,
Lord, abide with me.
5. When the shades of death prevail,
Father, let me cling to thee ;
When I pass the gloomy vale,
Lord, abide with me.
6. Then, oh, then, my raptured soui
Heaven's eternal rest shall see;
There, while endless ages roll,
Live and reign with thee.
130
i
GO TO JESUS.
H N.I J J Jhs,
Woids and Music by Rev. I. Baitzeix.
4
4— Mv
t=i=z
-&-
-m-
■0—9-
0-9
s£gz?zi
jg
ao:
1. When the clouds are gath'ring o'er thee, And the sky is thick with gloom ; When thy path looks dark before thee,And thou
[wand'rest far from
2. When thy heart with grief is breaking, And thy soul is filled with fears ; When no balm can soothe the aching,And no hand
[can wipe the
M^c
home,Go to Jesus.he will cheer thee Thro' this wilderness so drear,He's a friend that's ever near thee,Trust in him, and never fear,
tears, Go to Jesus, he is waiting To receive you to his breast ; He will drive away all sorrow ; He will give your spirit rest.
.-*-*■#- -0--0- -#--#- -£?--*-
I I I
3. Does thy heart of sin distress thee?
Art thou longing to be free?
Dost thou feel, with all thy striving
Sin is ever conquering thee ? — Quk
4. Go to Jesus, he is calling,
" Weary pilgrim, come to me ;
Bring your every burden with you,
I wm. quickly make you free."— &o>
I'M THINKING OF HOME.
i
Moderate
V
^=^i
J^U
— <-
\-
-K-
3iT
-I
&
--
-N— *t
>J
-j±5
131
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
-m-
' frw-
uSizzsz:
S=
B
1. I am thinking of home, of a home far a - way, Where the many bright mansions be; Of
— I — ri- -1 1 1 cZ. »^0_
ci - ty with
f
fct:
WES
F^tt-
H5
I u p b b
tng I 1/ IT
P
J — J I — 0—0-
streets made of glittering gold, Which the righteous alone shall see.
r fT utX4=:i=££
±*
W=^-W—t
X-+-
i
J-J^-^*-
Oh, home, sweet home, sweet home, I am
sweet home,
«
£=£:
:tst
r
v v
ft
"St
, Sl I.N,
^y
Se[e
longing for home, sweet home, Be - yond the pearly gates many mansions wait For the weary marching home.
sweet home,
^-K
x=*zr*
f-M
t=t=t
•p — II 'ill!
£
-mttl
jk—m—W—
t=
H
£
i--fr-JH-
2. I am thinking of home where they need not the light
Of the sun, or the moon, or star;
For no n'ght ever comes, but the traveller may
Sweetly rest in that home afar. — Cho.
M-
3. I am thinking of home, of the loved over there,
Happy kindred who've gone before;
Ye have gone to the home where the weary all rest,
To the home on the blissful shore.— Cho. '
133
P
£#
^
0/>£// W/Z>£ 77/ £ GOLDEN PAT£,
mh
"Z?
j^rEpE^ESEEst^
Arranged for this "Work.
Jt, — i — rv_ k-
1.0 pen wide the golden gate, Let the lit tie wand'rers in; Let them, now no long-er wait, The' their
^
a
■&-*-
*^—?-*ir
£
-#-
<5>-
»"~9— -0^—p—\
£
#■
-»— #-
&-
p^eE
z^y^-y— h-»-— y
v
&-
M~^
&-
-I b1-
-\ — N-
-jp— — » — ^ — v-
V
-IS1-
EgEgEgjEEgEjE^FrE^^
N Is -ft
*=£
-0-
lives are soil'd by sin ; There is room enough for them In the per-fume - la-den bow'rs, Room for many a sparkling
£
z
-#-=—#
-fcziz
-B>-
■&-
-v—v-
£=E
=Z=t=j— ; iiEE^EEdEZlllE^Z
Refrain.
— fv
Ps 1-4 j v-4
4s--i!=*±3=3EEE^
fe^bB
-*— *-
-jt-v-
m
& S. d L|^Ex~ #~ m^-*-J-zt-a-J9-Tfc-w-t — i J " ' "«— - ' *-+-
gem, 'Mid the Mas - ter's living flow'rs. Let them come in, let them come in, Let the
come in, come in,
. jf-jg. — . . — *-* . — *-*— *-
2=3
■«?-
-Jez*e:
5t
-is-
PF
t±
&
&•
-r-\rir i
2. Suffer them to come to him,
She^nerd of the cherub band ;
He can light the valley dim,
Leading from this desert land,
Nurtured with a kindly care.
All the weeds of sin kept down,
Golden fruits their lives shall bear,
Till they win the sparkling crown.
£
-^p^s
.=i_a
££
lit - tie wand'rers in.
1
-Vr
3. And with golden harps in hand,
Gladd'ning all that blest abode,
They shall shine, a star-gem'd band,
In the coronal of God ;
Open, then, the golden gate,
Let the little wand'rers in;
See the blessed Saviour wait,
Wait to save their souls from sin.
I
From GOODLY PEARLS, by per.
WE COME TO THEE, DEAR SAVIOUR.
Music by J. J. Hoor-
13 3
u
™£zf£
=era
0-^-0-
— j-
H r
-5-
*^r
1. We come to thee, dear Saviour, Just because we need thee so, No other name can save us, Ob,what bliss that came to know !
sriftftt [[ '111
IfTCfTff
P#-#-
M
a if Cliorus.
■#nft ri— ->
s
i=*
~>
se*
*«
t
*♦•"♦
3fe
t=5C
fa 1 ^
"3:
won ! 0 plenti-ful redemption, Through God's eternal Son.
-0-J-0-r*-'*-r * ■-» — #— s — 0-r0-'-0— 0-r\ ~— *- P ■ 0' 0 .
^=zfa^zEEgk=k£— Epfz^fig-r-r— gfr^K
i ' i u r r i y II
2.
We come to thee, dear Saviour,
None will have us, Lord, but thee ;
And we want none but Jesus,
And his grace that makes us free.
O bountiful salvation ! &c.
3.
We come to thee, dear Saviour,
It is love that makes us come ;
"We are certain of our welcome,
Of our Father's welcome home.
O bountiful salvation 1 &c.
We come to thee, dear Saviour,
For to whom, Lord, can we go,
The words of life eternal
From thy lips forever flow.
O bountiful salvation ! &c.
5.
We come to thee, dear Saviour,
And thou wilt not ask us why;
We cannot live without thee,
And still less without thee die.
O bountiful salvation 1 &c
134
GOME JO THE SAVIOUR TO- DAT.
Rev. A. A. Graley.
££
i
-*i — i — •
-^ m m-
3=3
4a£
2
2
>— *
fc-Jt
-#- -#-
1. Oh, come to the Saviour, dear children, to - day, 'Tis
2. You hear of the cross where Im - man - u - el bled, And
3. How man - y short graves in the graveyard you see, How
4. Then fly to the Saviour, dear children, to-day, While
^
• C_ 1
-tf-
» — 0 9
-# — * — #-
-9 — 0— -»~
E*
foil - ly to wait till you're old - er ;
tears down your fa- ces are stealing;
man - y dear children there slumber !
life's fee - ble ta - per is burn-ing;
r
The
But
And
The
£
S
-S-*
*
^L
v~v— h — zttzg
■+■
JzL
■v-
-P—P-^
E
*
4^ — U
i
^— 4
M
N h 1
• * *i
*-*
jotat
2- + + + 4 J-
heart is now ten - der, but if you de - lay, 'Twill sure - ly grow hard-er and bold-er.
when a few years have roll'd o - ver your head, You'll hear of that cross with - out feel-ing.
few may the days of your pil - grim - age be ; No mor - tal can tell us their num-ber.
Spi -it now strives; should you grieve him a- way, In vain may you wait his re - turn-ing.
— JT M i v v
fc
£
COME TO THE SAVIOUR T 0 - D A Y -Concluded
135
tmmmM
0-
9
3
heed to the warning,
*=3*
*
r
-s^—
T
[
Ere life's sun - ny morning, Be clos'd in the night of the grave.
*
£
=P=P=
I
fi-r
EI
£
j£
tub
r
Moderato.
JESUS IS CALLING.
Words and Music by Rev. I. BaLtzeix.
<A
\=&
1. .Te -sus calls, "dear children, Come to me and live," Hoar him gently Bay - ing, " Why the spirit grieve
2. Je- sus waits to save you, Waits to save you now; While he bids you welcome, At rfis footstool bow.
-0- -0- -0- -0- •#-' -0- -0- -0- -0- -0^0^ -0- -0- -0- -0- •#-• -f*- -#- #• -0-
&3=EEE
1— tr-
Chorus.
T
-f:-
i
W=*--\^*—*^fi—*
4s
P-i-
#_^
*]?Jlf
is— N
-N-^r
fc=^
I I
I
irzl:
S-*
*-*■
£3=*
i
^— *
5— »
fcfc*
-z*
i~<5?— ■—
P§^
Je - sus is calling, calling, calling, Je - sus is calling, children, come
call - ing, call - ing, call - ing,
-0- -0~ -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0- -0--0--0--0--0--0-0--0-it
-H 1 i-H V- h 1 rH 1 * 0 i + a r~\ 1 1 i-H ~ 1 1 r-£ F-
£
£=
*
-+
P — l»
I
■v— u*-
v— fr*— y-
£=£=£=£
±Z=£=£
£=£
w w
Hear the gentle Jesus
Speaking now to you;
"Trust in me forever;
I will guide you through." — Cho.
Oh, no longer linger.
When he bids you come;
Come, oh come, to Jesus,
While there yet is room. — Cho.
136
Words adapted.
FAINT NOT, CHRISTIAN.
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
1
1. Faint not, Christian, tho' the road, Leading to thy blest abode, Where the Saviour waits to welcome pilgrims o'er,
2. Faint not, Christian, tho' the world Has its hostile flag unfurled, And the foe is strong asid mighty in the field:
■^4:
-#*-*-
:£=£:
»^-H0 — »—
-#JL-#-
v— v— v— v i k--^-
Si-4
tttt
-v—v-
*±
¥~
V-
is
-M>
=3==£=
^ — r\-#
s
£
-N-
itizitz^
-Z^-s-
1
Is all dark, anddang'rous, too; Christ, thy Guide, will bring thee thro'. Faint not,Christian, soon you'll reach the blissful shore
Hold the cross of
Je-sus fast, Thou shalt o - vercome
" -0. m -02 -»- -02 -0- -0-.
at last
■m-
For the Saviour is thy helmet, sword and shield.
Refrain.
W
£4
tr-|?t
Ev-er be strong,
in the Lord,
n
£==rv
£
-« — «■
2.
^=qs=i
\-d— J— -N— P— J
-^
-F=r«-
oclfezz
■r
Z*-i— J
E
n
f=£££
Ev-er be strong, Bear the cross, and you shall wear the sun-bright crown.
in the Lord, . bright crown.
j£=±
p. 0 0 r r
»- -&-
b=n
-v—v-
"£-*^
%
t-
£
3. Faint not Christian, Jesus near,
Soon in glory will appear
With the holy band of angels in the sky ;
Christ, the Lord, is over all,
He'll not suffer thee to fall,
But will save thee in his home of love on high.— Refrain.
4. Faint not, Christian, look on high,
See the harpers in the sky ;
Patient wait, and thou "shalt join the holy band,
Soon with them you'll join the song
Of salvation, loud and long;
In the kingdom of the holy thou shalt stand. — Refrain.
"Words arranged
IS
SEAL ME EVER THINE.
137
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
-&
1-
U^h
tfc£
1. Come, blessed Saviour, take my heart, And nev - er-more from me de - part ; Come, precious Saviour,
* ?-*—* —m *_,--* * (2— r -* *-^-«— * t^-fi 0 & _# #^_#
fc^
-B>-
-g-r— m— i — r
f
*=]?
fcfc
=3=F
-&-
H «-i PV — I ■
m a 4
** Chorus. ,
N-*
-=»-=■■
5fc
£
.V
^
•r5-*-
— #v-*-
seal me thine ; Thy new and precious name be mine, Saviour come, Saviour come, Saviour
Saviour come, Saviour come,
42-
u - u — i—
E^
-h
£££
±=£t
x g: g g x
I
tJ
i-* &
p— g/—
S^
<S|-T-
#
-$±pE3
fefe
*=*
*"
^-
£
£3
<— ^
3
j i i
3=*=5t
3=t-
C
come, Saviour come, Oh, come, precious Saviour, take my heart, And never-more from me dc-part.
S.i\ iour come, Saviour come,
rU. L -U-
=P4=-
•i-*—*-.^
Q
Ft^
-t—ft—fZ-r*—*:--*
+
-IS1-
■L-l — b— £
£*
±=±
f
2. Sweetly on Jesus I repose,
Kindly protected from my foes;
Willing to suffer day by day,
Willing to follow Christ, the way.— Cho.
8. Now. blessed Saviour, keep thy throne,
In my poor heart, now all thy own,
Now Saviour, take me, thou art mine,
Bless me, and seal me ever thine. — Cho.
138
WHAT SHALL THE HARVEST BE?
Words arranged for this Work.
Music by Rev. I. Baltzeix.
aH^V-F1^ — sr ~ k ET-A--J\f
Mi lJ. I a k IS J | J 1_
m — 9 — #— I-
«— 0 — #— L
A— ^^v-
1. Sowing their seed in the beau-ti - ful dawn,
2. Sowing their seed by the way side so high,
"fi
t
■*-— W-W-
Sowing their seed in the noon-day sun ;
Sowing their seed on the rocks to die,
-0- -0- -0- -0~ I IS m
Sowing their seed when the
Sowing their seed when the
-0- -0- -0-
-0 0 — 0 — 0
~W=¥-
*-
*•—*
-fcs i
8Errm^m?
-v—v—v—v-
V—
ft-J0-J0-J0.
4-4
r v
Chorus.
v~v~v~v~v~v
±
H=±
Jtzjir
-*-=-•-
-0-±
darkness comes on, What shall the harv-est be?
win - ter is nigh, What shall the harv - est be ?
tm
3
-%-
jfcr
Sow
r
ing in time
0-
for e-
Sow-ing in time for
-0- -0- -0- -0-
fTl I r^Frr-rrr^rrrf
ter - - - - - - ni - ty,
Sow-ing in time for e - ter - ni - ty,
What . . • shall
"What shall the harvest
the bar - - - - est be? What shall the harvest be?
be ? what shall it be ?
TTT
m
£
iFFE
•£••£• a
jeqirsze
WL
+±*-
±1
v—v—v-^-
^w^wm
tctc
ft=
3. Sowing the seeds of a lingering pain,
Seeds of remorse in a maddened brain;
Oh, at the judgment you'll meet them again,
Dark will the harvest be. — Cho.
4. Good seed keep sowing wherever you go;
Never be idle while here below :
Jesus will water it, cause it to grow,
Great will the harvest be. — Cho.
tJ
FEED MY LAMBS.
m
hf=t
S
■■#■
U—fc
*
139
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
# • #-
■*!-?
K— €
-r
^
Bt
-N.
r-4-
-K-
^*-
1. "Feed my lambs," how con-de - scend- ing, How com - pas - sion - ate the grace Of the Saviour just as-
2. Rich-est treasure, dear - est to -ken, From his stores of love to give; Kept from age to a^e. im-
■f^-f- -*-•-*--*--*- ,. -*- m . ^ ^ . -A- -*- -A- -£2. -*-• ^- i-' 4- A X
fc
1L
£
'^- — v1 — £ -P — £~~— V1 — ^— p
cend-ing,
bro-ken,
Thus to bless our infant race. Lovest thou the blessed Saviour? Hast thou heard the great command?
Till its bounty we re - ceive. Lovest thou, ifcc.
H«f-€
-0- JL. .A- 42-
■V— P
/— -
H H
1—T"
.^_
v— V-
V — I/-
^E
r-r
E3
v
*N
t=^=t
4-
4-1.
RiL
£att
F=T
If thou lovest mo, thy Saviour,
9-O—m-
Feed my lambs."
(2-
3. Who, without that word of blessing,
Could our dark estate have told?
Sin and woe our bouIs distressing,
Lost, and wandering from bis fold. — Cho.
4. "Feed my lambs!" ye pastors, hear it!
Feed the flock of bis own hand;
Oh, for him, let us, revere it, —
Keep the Shepherd's last command.— Ch
140
Spirited.
WE ARE HOMEWARD BOUND.
$m&&gm£k&£&mm
Arranged by Rev. I. BaltzelL.
i5S
1 We are homeward bound to the land of light and love ; W ith a swelling sail we onward sweep ; Tho' the rude winds blow,there is
2. Though the billows rise, they shall never overwhelm ; Tho' the breakers roar upon the lee, 'Mid the strife we'll sing for we ve
^t. #. -f- -f- -£.* -*-
I* U i U la bs — b
s
I^Z^L
£r-fi-!^
-(9- -F- -F-1 -i
S3S3S
jjjgjgaiilS
-^ — \r
-N-«t
V
=f
Chorus.
4^
itr
fefe
A— £-J
— N— i Fv— k-
One who rules above, Who will guide the weary sailor o'er the deep. We are homeward bound, we're tossing on the tide, But the
Jesus at the helm, He will guide her safeiy o'er the rolling sea. We are homeward, &c
. -f--*1 ■#■ -r*- -f*5 -#" --»--- -F- -F-* -F- -F-* -#•
:-"£• f'
2-
#— B^
v— v-v-
t
■&±-Xr.
*
9- -9- #. -#--f-' /-/-
I
^^
KS
*
t
^~K
ae^s^^^iPi
"Z?
wild dark tempest soon will cease ; When the storm is past we'll safe at anchor ride, In the port of ev-er-last-ing peace.
EHEE
*
:t7— P-U=£-
-e>--
e£
F— P
£
ir-^
FT
3. Though for ages past she has ploughed the stormy main,
She's as worthy as in days of yore ;
'Mid the rocks aiid shoals, and the fearful hurricane,
She has thousands brought to Canaan's happy shore. — Cho-
SseS
?E=p:
— 9
-v—v-v—
-&r
r
4. We are homeward bound; won't you join our happy crew?
Come aboard, poor sinner, while you may ;
To the eye of faith there's the better land in view,
'Tis the land that shines with never-ending day.— GAa.
"Words by Rev. W. Kenny.
SING OF A SAVIOUR'S LOVE.
IN rs fS
141
Chorus.
WU+U1
,_s_i_ff
^
j /Oh. come, happy children, u - nite in our song, Sing of a Saviour's
\ With hearts full of gladness his praises prolong, He is the friend we love
P P P
love ; ) Then join in ho-san-nah's to
Jp-^P—T . P P P PP P
4 1 '-*+— L-h 1 1 1 1 P
r { i> u y is v v y
fe
fi:
V v
F
mmmmmm&£
Jesus, our King, Loud let the chorus exultingly ring, Sing of his love, Sing of his love, Sing of a Saviour's love.
?■
Jt_kL L-
:[/=£
■+-
— r*— • —0—0—0— 0-rr—*
^ -+--I — i — i — i — i — H — L-
p—p^p-P
-0—0-
VTf
. We'll sing of his mercy who for us hath died,
Sing of a Saviour's love;
Rejoicingly sing of our Lord crucified,
He is the friend we love.— Cho.
. We'll praise him for coming our souls to redeem,
Sing of his wondrous love;
Till earth's happy millions shall join in our theme,
Praising the friend that we love. — Cho.
. Oh, do you not hear him, now bidding you come,
Come to his arms of love ?
€-€-«-«
i , i, i , i — *\-
V-V-k-4
M-P-P-
l=— (a
#=*=»
V V V
+—0
t
>-
y-v-k-i-
0-0
0^0-*-
Then, why will you tarry? for yet there is room,
Room in his arms of love. — Cho.
5. Oh, come, then, and join in the song that we sing,
Singing of him we love;
Join all your glad voices in praise to our King,
Praises to him we love. — Cho.
6. Then, glory to Jesus, shall still be our song,
Glory to him we love;
For glory and praises unto hi m belong;
Praises to him we love. — Cho.
143
By Per. of BiGunr Jfc Maik
rs k w is is
MERRY, MERRY CHRISTMAS.
Woras and Music by Mrs. T. J. Cook.
V. 1. 2. 3. Merry, mer-ry Christmas ev' - ry where ! Cheer-i - ly it ringeth through the air; Christmas hells, Christmas trees,
JL. J^. j£. -£-
Hs Is Is 1
t-t
s^— 4-P— P— g— V— V-
#=P— *— ?— *-
v \S J
*
irrrT
r
i/— P-
r
£=£
in -
-p— k-
V-V-
F=N
fc-fr
*-*-
i
3— 3=«M=3
^_~*
7
*=3
i
Christmas odors on the breeze ; Merry, merry Christmas ev' - ry where! Cheer-i-ly it ringeth through the air.
-*. JL. -fiL ^L
■V— k"
v— v— \
-t
.£. .#- -^- -*-
Jt -£.
*_*_#_^_-p:
m— k
£— 2— £
*
v-v-
fe
Ip=P_£_^_«_^-
0
tr
0
0
r
£=p=E
r
1. Why should we so joy-ful-ly Sing with grateful mirth ? See! the Sun of Righteousness Beams upon the earth!
2. Light for wearv wau-der-ers, Comfort for th' oppressed ; He will guide his trusting ones In -to perfect rest.
3. Deeds of faith and char-i - ty; These our offerings be, -Leading ev'- ry soul to sing, Christ was born for me!
. j*. -^^ M- .#. -*- -*- -*- -*- #. #.
*=
1 Vr
V V V V
X
V—)/-
T*
:^_^_-^-^-
1/ V 1/ &
4EZ3LZ-?-
t=Z
«=£
■v V V V
T
I
FORBID THEM NOT.
g£fetefe
r^-
Ttev. A. A. Graley.
143
vJ i i ~ y
1. When man - y to the Saviour's feet Their lit - tie chil-dren brought, And from the source of bless-ed-ness, A
2. " For - hid them not, nor harshly chide Their wish to see my face, For lit - tie children such as these My
-A-
1-JU+
_| ^ = J J
Sa - viour's bless -ing sought; To some who, with mis - ta - ken zeal, The near ap - proach for-
Fa - ther's king - dom grace." Then gathered in his lov - ing arms, And fold - ed to his
la - ther s king •
u.
3. Dear children, Jesus is tlie same,
Though now enthroned above;
He wails to bless you as of oid
With his forgiving love.
He marks with joy each faint attempt
His favor to obtain ;
And those who early seek his face
Shall never seek in vain.
144 - WATCHING AND WAITING,
Words by Rev. W. H. Btjrrell.
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
1. Oh, how pleasing the prospect of home, Where lov'd ones a-gain I shall see; There,in sorrow no longer to
2. They have lauded on life's golden shore ; From earth's trying scenes they are free ; There where sin shall disturb them no
*±£.
*±-^
fc^=P
£
■#-#*-#-
v v
— o — &' — »-
!• V
rt
.JZi
*^p-
&—'*-?
£-*=§
£
?
-i — v—y-
jp^jp^t-
&±-&—p—
1~tr
n
f— ^
-&—m—-
f--fr-
t-tr-?
rp^
^
££
Chorus.
zJzi3i=qz^i=i&:p^:
3=5
it-i
I=£
roam, They are watching
more, They are watching
It-
-- <■
Pi¥
I
cs
3
V-fr
lg
-£5Li_-pi_£-
_]fc_
-^— k
*
and waiting for
and waiting for
— P «* »--#"
me.
me.
■v—v-
Vr
-v—v
-&-*- -
They are
They are
watching and waiting for me,
watching, &c.
^=S^=S=n
They are
Yes, for me,
-&-
-W1-*-
(*—£
=£
JjL—?i-?-
v V
1 fV-U N-A
■^m
EE
■+
V—V
#— F^-*
^-#-
#-
r^rt
I N— fcj f^-fir-4
1-=— « — I— #- -J — H -« — J. J f
-H h — ^* lr-«-
"^:.
lis
-A — s- —j i— -N«-
watching and waiting for me, There the dear ones I love, in
Yes, for me.
d — h — ^^ — i — \—0r-^i *f — i
E
those regions above, Are watching and waiting for me.
J — ; — I ! 1— —I 1 1 . p- -F *--n^*^-r
?—?~^
Xr-
l
-£
£±=£=£
©>-
r
E
They are happy and blessed, I know,
Reclining beneath life's blest tree;
With their garments as white as the snow,
They are watching and waiting for me. — Cho.
I am longing to share in the rest,
Away to their arms I would flee;
Where so pure, and so holy and blest,
They are watching and waiting for me. — Cho.
UP, AND DOING.
Mueic by Rev. I. Baltzell.
145
1. Up, and do - ing, lit - tie children, Up, and do - ing while 'tis day; Do the work your Master
'-& — « — «=
-^ * # — r
v
v-
:SE
-N-
— 4-
# — # — # - J — — #-tr:
F
-J lS s, *
A-
N-tr
* • f i t
gives you; Do not loi - ter by the way, For we all have work he-fore u>, You, dear child, as well as
^- +- ■&. • +. JL JL _ JL
■4—
I:
Let
I£T
J
^
is>_
ns
seek to learn
■T' f ;=
our
t"
^=:qe
du
+-
t
* —
r<c
^
i
tv, And per - form it cheer - ful - lv
^=1
T
i
Up. and doiiis. little children,
Help the ]>oor whom Jesua loves;
Toll the sinner of the Saviour,
Who still lives to Mess above.
Follow him who died to save you,
Never, never cease to pray,—
Proy for pardon, pray for blessing, —
Pray lor guidance every day.
3. Up, and doing, little children,
Trust not to thyself alone;
But work out your own salvation,
Through the grace of God's dear Son.
Jesus loves you, little children,
Turn not from his love away ;
But go lorth and do his bidding;
Up: and doing while 'tis day.
146
MY CLASS, MY CLASS.
Arranged for this Work.
1. When Sab-bath's hallowed morn I greet, What makes its sa - cred hours so sweet? The thought that I this
J*
s
=*?
■b-
i — r
i^3
«
-*-
t^
^
-*■•-#■
:a
E
day shall meet My class, my
-0-' -0- -0-
-I F P a-
class.
^
*=f
?C
£
I
■v~v
2. When to the closet I repair,
To tell my wants to Jesus there,
What is the burden of my prayer?
My class, my class.
3. When o'er the verdant fields I stray,
Or, roaming at the close of day,
What thoughts beguile me on my
My class, my class. [way ?
*-*=
4. When mingling with the busy throng,
Or, singing as 1 march along,
What is the burden of my song?
My class, my class.
5. And when from sorrow I am free,
And saved in blest eternity,
What is it there I'll wish to see?
My class, my class.
REMEMBER THY CREATOR.
B . I
£■
ts
4=2
i
1P3
i. -* .
=w
«-*
A
9 Ltf_L^
is
:*— 9i
t
:=N=*
1. " Re-member thy Cre - a - tor," Now in thy youthful days, And he will guide thy foot ..teps thro' Life's uncertain ways.
2. "Re-member thy Cre - a -tor," Ere in thy sun-ny way, Thefiow'rs of hope shall fade and die, Sorrow end the day.
3. " Re-member thy Cre - a- tor," He calls in tones of love, He offers you e-ter-naljoy In his home a -hove.
4. Then, when life's storm is over, And thou from earth art free, Thy God will call thee to his home In e-ter-ni - ty.
-0 — 0-
V-
*—W-
V— V-
■m — m — I r
r
REMEMBER THY CREATOR -Concluded. 147
• y -0~ ~0~ "^" ^P" "^ —
Re-mem-ber thy Cre - a - tor, Re-mem-ber thy Cre - a - tor, Re-member thy Cre - a - tor now, In thy youthful days.
§?=£
-0—0-
3ESOE
■ £ I [i VI 1 1
'f=F=9
9rr-£
v y v
70-
m
V— V 'J l^
■0—0-
-l—t
V~^r
t
-f=\
0 — o — i
V ]/ I
*
w — v — Wi IVl 1 —
■U—U—U-? -tpi=tz
By Per. of 0. Ditbow.
8
fi
3
i
NEARER, MY GOD, TO THEE.
i
From the " Asaph."
I
a
T
<g. g
3^3
-#--rS*
1. Near-er, my
2. Tho' like a
SB
X
God, to thee, Near-er to
wan-der-er, Daylight all
thee ;
gone,
^T
^-~
*-&
"^-S-
E'en tho' it
Darkness be
be
o >
a cross
ver me,
-&-
±
^_t
?=?z
^=P=^
^
-£?-
!
pff
£<2
^-S-
75>-
-B»-
J
^
?=^
That raiseth
My rest a
t
-&-
'¥=£
me,
stone,
f
■n
fH-^U=±
I
5
t— ri
4-4-
pp.
■&
gjr--gJT-zJ
3=3=
=t
S
<&*—&
& — <C — ^
S^8^
^
^^
-+-
-»-si-#
-^-s
J-*
"2^"2?-
"27
Still
Yet
a:
42 — 0Z
W-
^
«-
yhgrrr-
— ©^— I —
E
:&
J
^={i:
PZ^IT
r^'
thee,
thee.
all my song shall be, Near-er, my God, to thee, Near-er, my God, to thee, Near-er to
in my dreams I'd be Near-er, my God, to thee, Near-er, my God, to thee, Near-er to
-&——
+
r
£=£
-I — I-
3. There let the way appear
Steps up to heaven ;
All that thou sendcst me
In mercy given,
Angels to beckon me,
Jfaarer, my God, Ac. _
4. Then with my waking thoughts,
Bright with thy praise,
Out of my stony griefs,
Bethel I'll raise :
So by my woes to be
Bearer, my God. 6c.
r
i
8. Or, if on joyful wing,
Cleaving the sky,
Sun, moon, and stars forgot,
Upward I fly,
Still, all my song shall be,
Nearer, my God, Ac
148 'T/3 BUT LITTLE WE CAN DO.
From S. S. Blackboard. By permission of A. O. Van Lennep.
Words by Josephine Pollard.
JUM-
*=i=:J:
-a yd J-
-i=$
^M
1. 'Tis but lit - tie we can do,
4X14 f- f-
t^
£
Je - sus to re - pay,
P
-K— h— N-
ii— e— ai— ^
£#
4-
Music by S. J. Vail.
Fine.
£
2— IT —
— # —
_i__*a Si 1
J:
For the kindness be bestows On us ev' - ry day.
v— v-
W0
-£> — #T
^- #. H*. ^-
f^t
^-U— ^-
r
t±
*
v— k— k-
For the kindness he bestows On us ev' - ry day.
I
D. c. 'Tis but lit - tie we can do, Je-sus to re-pay,
wm&rmm
m
^~-N-_^
D. C. for Chorus.
N J _-
l£P£i
"i
-s -^— «— *— J- — i1
Life, and health, and strength he gives, Friends, and loving care, All the blessings he enjoys, He would have us share.
JUU^
I E 1/ trV-^-p-f
#—#—#—#—#-
It
£
4=t
S— p-
jt ^ £: :£ jl.
-» — # — * — * — f— —
11=1=1
1
^
1/-Vt^
«-
£=E
V f
V— V— t
■V-V— k
Little hands have work to do
Jesus will approve ;
He will teach them how to be
Ministers of love.
Little ones can go to him,
Asking him to fill
Little hearts, that they may be
Strong to do his will.
3. He would have us kind and good,
Ready to forgive;
He would have us work with him,
In his presence live.
Every day, and every hour,
Good we may impart,
If the loving Saviour finds
Boom in every heart.
TAKE MY HAND, DEAR JESUS.
From S. S. Blackboard. By permission of A. 0. Van Lennep.
149
Words by Kate Osborn.
With feeling.
Music by Will. W. Bentley.
j* r J" Is i j J r r i J
i s i i I* i \j t *
1. Ev - er blessed
2. Ev - er blessed
3. Help me, blessed
Je
Je
Je
LJt ~'-A — i U — i- — i- — - — ) 1-
sus, Listen un - to me, Bow thine ear and bear me, While I call to
sus! Bless thy wayward child, Keep my feet from stray -ing Thro' the des-ert
Leave me not a - lone; Give me strength and patience, Till each duty's
£:£:£:£: £ £: £:
v—^—^—u-
_?_?_?—?-
n
V
-0-
■b
t=t
U
-+-
£
t
thee;
wild ;
done;
^2_ _
F=^
^— W-
-B>
-ft*
#3
4\_ n— ?\-a-
J
-fc*
\-N
ia
?5i —
-n— pv
^=E
fc*
■fv-v
-*-*-
*
PI
I am weak anil sin - ful, Thou art pure and strong, Take my hand, dear Je - sus, Lead thy child a - long.
I would never wan-der From thy lov-ing side, Ev - er blessed Je - sus. Be my constant guide.
And when life is end- ed, I thy'face would see; Hear my pray'r, dear Je -sus, Take me up
to
lonj
guid
thee.
t— ?— ?-*
■LJU^S 1_ l_ 1 _
V—S-—V-
1
t— ,-?—?— p—t
:£==t
y b !/ b~
-£2-
? p p
# — »-
y w
rr
:szi .
Refrain.
A — V — V
4-5 uJ 1—
-*— *
-X-
*
-K i
fr
i=^4—i-
1&L
-&r
Take mv hand dear Je - sus, Let menev-er stray, Take my hand, and lead me, In the bet-ter way.
-» — IP — •-
t==^e=LfErfELiE ef i-r-r-r-f
*—?—?
rm
I
150
THY FATHER CALLS, "COME HOME."
From " Joyful Songs " by permission of Wis. G. Fischer
k I | 1st. , , 2c?.
g i 9 I J J J.I | — j3 | I J 1
, 1 ,
-a #—
4
3
^?^=r
f
f
f
1. Breth-ren, while we so-journ here. Fight we must, but should not fear ;
Foes we have, but we've a friend, (Omit. -•--••-) One that loves us
-/*-#-
*-#.
£
to the end;
£
y1^§-f
i
mr ila
HM»-
M-
fc&
JZ
F
FE
jsU-^U-i
fe^
■^ — 8--S
J
i J 3.12 U-3tt
*xtt
*
fctti
*
Forward, then, with courage go, Long we shall not dwell below ; " Child," your Father calls, " Come home."
Soon the joyful news will come,
■ £ TT f-.f ft * : .f- f" f f-,f- g »-4^»-» ;tlf f-^ffp f g\fcc=g
^P
F*
i
#— p:
5
Mr
Tv
Cho. — "Come home!" "Come home J"
U
jftJrJ hJrr.
" Come home !" " Come home !" " Come home !"
I P1, I h v, , _ h 1 — ,1 N k-^T Is,
i
fefej^
Come home, come home, Thy Father calls, "Come home, come home, come home, Thy
£S
F
2
5«t^
come home, come home,
come home, come home, come home !
/7\
Father calls, " Come home!"
W^
F£
"Words by Fanny Crosby.
COME AGAIN.
By Per. of Biolow k Kjl.uk.
^-rrJ-^'-^rJ-H-
151
Fine.
W
a ^ *#
1. Have you spent a pleasant day ? Conic again, come again ; Would von learn the better way, Then come, come a-gain ;
■^ ft 8 »
*— *
-» — *
"\
-For Chorus, sing 1st verse to Fine.
Here you'll find a welcome true, Hearts that warmly beat for you, They will tell you what to do, 0 come, come a-gain.
9:
*P
# — # — #
.1 , 1
1st
*^-9—+
t±ts.
— i — r
Would you leave all sinful ways?
Come again, come again ;
Would you join our cheerful lays?
Then come, ( ome again.
"We are bound forCanaan's land,
Will you come and join our band?
"We will take you by the hand,
O come, come again.
Words of comfort you shall hear,
Come again, come again ;
From the Book we love so dear,
Then c< me, come again;
Jesus suffered on the tree,
Jesus died for you and me,
His disciple you maybe,
U come, come again.
4 Come on every Sabbath day,
Come again, come again ;
Never, nevt r stay away,
O come, come again ;
Now improve the hours that fly,
They are gliding swiftly by,
You are not too young to die,
Then come, come again.
Tn the way a thousand snares
Lie to take us unawares:
Satan, with malicious art,
Watches each unguarded heart;
But from Satan's malice free
Saints shall soon in glory be ;
Concluded from opposite page.
Soon the joyful news will come,
"Child, your Father calls you home."
But of all the foes we meet,
None so olt mislead our feet —
None betray us into sin,
Like the foes that dwell within ;
Yet let nothing spoil your peace,
Christ shall also conquer these;
Then the joyful news will come,
"Child, your Father calls you home."
159
/ LOVE THE LORD.
mm
n— h
^r-h— fe
£
mm
m
0-^—4
ray Redeemer lives ; What comfort that sweet sentence gives
Lord, J know 1 do; The best of all. he loves me too:
4^—4
1. 1 know that
Chorus. — / love the
hi
£
£
; He lives, he lives, who once was dead, He
I love the Lord, I know I do; The
'W^¥r^^^^^
&
£^?=&=*i
^
i
v—v
V V
p
fcfc
tr\
+-r
lives, my ev ■
best of all,
^=P=
2.
\
94=4#
er - last-ing head
he loves me loo.
V V I
-V-
-£-
He lives to bless me with his love ;
He lives to plead for me above ;
He lives, my hungry soul to feed ;
He lives to help in time of need. — Cho.
He lives, and grants me daily breath ;
He lives, and I shall conquer death ;
He lives my mansion to prepare;
He lives to bring me safely there. — Cho.
FIRMLY STAND.
He lives, all glory to his name;
He lives, my Saviour, still the same;
What joy the blest assurance gives,
I know that my Redeemer lives. — Cho.
He lives, my kind and gracious friend ;
He lives and loves me to the end ;
He lives, my Prophet, Priest, and King;
He lives, and while he lives, I'll sing. —
Cho.
Spirited.
£=£
te£
•br
JL
%
^Spl
^
te=t
4 +
1. Firm -ly, brethren, firm-ly stand, All u - nit-ed heart and hand, One unbroken valiant band of freemen
2. Lift your ban - ner, lift it high, Raise the Christian battle cry, For your conquering leader nigh (Omit.
cy-rfr-f
\
V¥&
nut.}
£
V V v~v
rrFFy
I
v-y-
^m
£-£
true;
:gy t:
I
2.
FIRMLY STAND.-vbnv/uded.
153
u
Chorus. , Is J1 h N I
t
is call-ing you. Firmly stand,
ye valiant band,
ye valiant band, O, firmly stand ye valiant band,
Firmly stand,
ye valiant
ye valiant band, 0, firmly
b£§
«=K
m
\
r> n
fej^
^
N
2
f#
t
fTTTT
nr-rc"
1/ U 1/
band, Firm - ly stand, ye val - iant band, All
stand ye val -iant band, ye val - iant band O firm - ly stand ye val - iant band,
:*=£
-£— r r
!-£rf t t f g
S
4*
fee
-p-l; i>> ^ — ^ — r
bf ^
1st
£=£
?
>
u>
V
ed heart and hand,
all u - ni-ted, heart and hand.
2.
Once our father freemen cried,
" Victory or death" betide !
But with Jesus on our side
We'll conquer too.
There to die, the battle won ;
There to fall, the warfare done ;
ilory, brighter than the sun,
Will be our due.
Firmly stand, etc.
Christ, our Captain's name we boast,
Quells the dark Satanic host;
Fall we then, each at his post,
As Christians brave.
Then in glory we shall meet,
Bow before the Saviour's feet,
And we'll sing, forever sweet,
His power to save.
Firmly stand, etc.
154
Words by Rkv. I. Baltzkix.
Moderate.
WEARY OF EARTH.
AS
Arranged from u old melody. <
£3H JU*ld;£
#i_g_f
m
1. 1
2. I
m^i_
am wea - ry of earth ; for the friends I love most dear Have been torn from my heart long a
am wea - ry of earth ; I would here no Ion - ger stay, Where the thorn and the this- tie do
go;
grow;
rrrti ***
*=r*
ggn^ra^a
»^
±=±
yC
3t
*
$
■ m .
*=fc
£-£
<T\
It
/TN
Fine.
v^
^5
^7-^
And I wish not to stay in this
For my dear ones have gone to the
wil - derness so drear ; To a home far a - way I would go.
land of end - less day, To that home far a - way I would go
m
t-£L±.
£
f±
h» — » » * » — I*-5-* — t i — A — -4—
$=£
m
*-•+-+-
»
-» — m-
S7\
:_£i
i
:£-
K
-tf-
■t^
I
I shall soon be released from the
Chorus.
J-j»a
sor-rowsof the world, And fly up to my home far a - way.
I
El J J,J>J ^
*=fc
^
£=£fcgB
:» — y-— i-»
■^-f-
-t^-
Oh, my home, Oh, my
Far a - way,
&m
home, I am long - ing for thee all the day.
Far a • way,
£
§1
*
t — n i'u=m
r-m-re
LIGHT IS DAWNING.
K.N h *. N
fe^te^
*=£
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell
155
eeMeM
— » — g . J^ _■
*— *-
^3
~* — w
^=?=
^~
1. Light is dawning, pilgrim, O'er thy lonely way ; Lift thine eyes with gladness, See the ris-ing day !
2. Jesus conies to cheer thee All thy journey through ; He will chase thy sorrow Like the morning dew.
W^E£
N— tv
B
£
/T\
^r^
V-M
fr-P-
vr
±t
V—\/
j Chorus.
i
t=fe
*=£
\
i
\
mm3*m
U- C 4- 3 J =3
S2
tf
:^=2
^-*— «t
^=^
UP.. w U
Then be cheerful, pilgrim, Chase away thy gloom; He shall light thy pathway, E
ven to the tomb.
gj^^^^^pu^^f^^^^
V—V
zsr
E
3. Yes, the night is passing,
Soon it will be done,
For the hills are gilded
With the rising sun. — Cho,
4. Weep no more, O pilgrim,
Soon the night will end ;
Thou hast spent it weeping,
Joy shall morn attend. — Cho.
5. When to endless glory,
Pilgrim, thou shall come,
Thou shalt rest forever [Cho.
In thy long-sought home. —
Concluded from opposite page.
3. 1 am weary of earth ; I am longing for my home
In the far distant land of the blest ;
Where no tear dims the eye, and no sorrows ever
come,
In that home far away I would rest. — Chorus.
4. 1 am weary of earth ; I am longing to be gone
To that mansion of glory on high ;
I am weary, my Saviour, of weeping here alone,
To my home far away let me fly. — Chows.
I am weary of earth ; I am waiting for Thy call,
Let the chariot no longer delay ;
I am waiting, I'm waiting, I'm waiting, Lord of
all;
Let me fly to my home far away. — Chorus.
EVERGREEN PL A! 19
1. Shall we meet beyond the riv-er,
2. Shall we meet where flowers are blooming,
that clime where an-gels dwell
Ev - er fade-less, ev
6v
er
Shall we meet where friendship
Where the light of day il -
H*
^
n^v-er
luming,
Sad -dest tales of sor - row
Lives of those who en - ter
■*■• •*• m. #- #- -#-
tell,
there.
Shall we meet, . . . .
shall we meet,
shall we meet,
meet on the evergreen plain? . . Shall we meet and know each other ever?
shall we meet,
v-vvv-
JL±
■#- #■•■#■
=£
J2
Shall we nev-er part
? rr
gain.
#-#-
H-
V— £
3. Shall we meet onr loved oompar'onz,
On that brighter, fairer shore?
When this life's great work is ended,
Shall we meet to part no more?
Chorus.— Shall we meet, <tc,
4. Yes ! we'll meet beyond the river,
Yes ! we'll meet upon the shore;
Yes ! we'll meet our lost companions,
Yes ? we'll meet to part no more.
Chorus. — Shall we meet, &c.
GATHERING HOME.
&3i
Words and Music bv Rev. I. Baltzell.
157
ste
1 . I
v K-j N fr
i
#
S£
4-5
N
-y»~y
:fci
Z*±3
§4%
4. We'll all gath-er home in the morn - ing, At the sound of the great ju - bi - lee, We'll all gather home in the
5. We'll all gat h-er home in the morn - ing, Our bless -ed Redeem -er to see, We'll meet with the friends gone be-
- ± ppp **■&. t- frf* ff, ,.,,„■ f,f 'frff f'f
Kn^-k
':
5
££
3C
£
^^
$
*4r
A
£
t^f^B^B
t
w— *
morn -ing; What a gath'ring that will be. What a gath - ring, sath' - ring,
fore us; What a gath'ring that will be. What a gath' ring that will be, that will be, What a gath'ring that will
T~ i m ml^ — # — 0 g__g. .r~* •F. ■ t- »
^^-lj^
Ff=f
ro
*
-#-^-^
^n^
vvrxi
£
rin
be; What a gath' - ring, gath'
be, that will be,Wblle the angels sing, we'll all gather home, What a gath'ring that will be
t- £•£♦ •#-•-•- '
?W L L.L L EIF > ^ K *
-rl^r-ris
-y— g-
^
•
i
L We'll all gather home in the
morning,
On the banks of the bright
jasper Bea,
We'll meet all the good and the
<Z_m faithful,
C ] | ,■ What a gath'ring that will be.
-^C'.TT What a gath'ring that will
9 L ~|nr What a gath'ring, etc.
158
j Smoothly.
STILL PRESS ON.
i 1 ^ 9 0 d"
*T— Or
i' o
4-
4-
Itt^ — i-
jfc*±*
-4
Music by Pev. I. BaltzelL.
0—0^-0
=£!
r
1
1. Press on, press on, tho' doubts a -rise, And fierce tempta-tionsmeet thy eyes, Raise up thy thoughts above the skies, And
2. Press on to do thy Mas-ter's will, The last re - mains of sin to kill, Thy soul with heav'nly grace to fill, And
ff
* W^F
=F
r-f— r
#^
£
£
t
£
1 *—*^JL
\m— U U . L
f
P^-^
1— r
-f^fi
-f^-x
SE
"\
still press on
still press on
m
r—W=r^
^
T
4*
I l
still press on, O, still press on,
press on, O, still press on, press on, O still press on,
mEET=£FEF
c
o,
^
^ i i i i rT
still press on Till thy work on earth is done,
press on, O still press on.
/7\
r ,-r r f f r
Sill
*f
1 fczB
-U k
^
r
3.
Press on, that perfect love to feel,
Which doth by death the witness seal,
As Jesus doth himself reveal,
O, still press on. — Chorus.
Press on, until with joy you see
The depth of Jesus' love to thee,
Till by his side you're pure and free,
O, still press on. — Chorus.
OH, HOME. SWEET HOME.
Music by Rev. I. Baltzell.
159
1. The ; a bright and beaming smile, Which in this world I sec, But turns ray heart to future joys, And
2. Though often here my soul is sad, And falls the si-lent tear; There is a world of smiles and love' \nd
-#- *- +- *- ,*. ^ ^ ^S
whispers heav'n to me.
sorrow comes not there
m
^^
Oh, home, sweet home, My bless -ed hap -py
Oh, home, etc.
sweet home, Oh, home, sweet home,
±
-v-
1—t
-±=b=k.
±
1/ I
home, Oh,
sweet home,
*=
sweet home, My bless - ed hap -py
sweet home, Oh, home, sweet homo,"
horae.
sweet home
T
3. 1 never clasp a friendly hand,
In greeting or farewell,
— But thoughts of my eternal home,
Within my bosom swell. — Cho.
4. There, when we meet with holy joy,
No thoughts of parting come ;
mH But never-ending ages still
fEZ Shall lind us all at home, — Cho.
160
I'M GOING TO YONDER BRIGHT GLORY.
Harmonized by Rev. I. "Baltzell.
Melody by E. K. Hershey.
%
m
s
'-*,-
*,-i
\ N-6, n s—nt-1 — i — ivr ^ ^ ^ ^ n ^
# — 0 — * — 0 J — #— -€^=7€ 5— — H-H 1 1 i
* L__^n #— c# — 4 — 4 — • — 0 — 0-
1. I'm go-ing to yonder bright glo-ry,
2. I'm go-ing to yonder bright glo-ry,
V"
Be-yond where the pearly gates stand; I'm crossing the cold, i - cy
To live with the Saviour at home ; He 's built me a beauti - ful
f W * f P-
3Sb=k
p
1111 L
P—P—P
b I !
V— v'— ^— F— V— V
5
?
Chorus, s s n
=fr
J «IJ
£
E C ■ C 11 1
-j-J-J-±-^
p
i
2&
bil - lows, To live in that beauti - ful land,
man - sion, And kindly in-vites me to come
Yes, o - ver the riv-er
— r-
i
-PS PS rS-
— I-
#— # #
# # 0-
»-' »
£=^
5
££
-1—
0—0—0—0-
x 1 H _(_
I'm go - ing, Beyond where the
going, I'm going,
H:
tM^-b-fcMy-V-
&fc
*-*-
r
V— V-
v*=«£
r
f
i> u-u ii— v— v-
^^ 0—1—0 1*4^* ;-f=F*— ^— 4— 4— ^==^=F[- * *^
N s _K N p ft. i__
*— *— #— j-^— ^TgT-g— F
pearly gates stand, To the home where there's nevermore sor - row, To live in that beau- ti - ful
- "■» nevermore sorrow,
3— +— +- -4—. +-
laud.
3 I'm going to yonder bright glory,
O seek not to draw me aside:
The heavenly boatman is waiting
To ferry me over the tide — Cho.
4 I'm going to yonder bright glory,
All hail, happy angels ! I come ;
My Saviour is there to receive me,
And welcome me into my home. — Cho*
SING OF THAT BEAUTIFUL LANC.
i
s-«
s=*
— I-
161
Arranged for this work.
-p — c— j-* — p —
r*
5
1. O sins; of that beauti - ful land, Where life evermore will be, Wherewith crowns and with palms in your
2. In visions my soul hath been cheered
>
-> 4
» • * » .
■#-J * r«^-
U P 1/
_«_L
-#-
By rays of that heav'nly light ; The darkness of night dia - ap-
ft
te
+-
-i —
JeM
J:
»*»
P
e:
IE
• #_#_
•-•
~tr
2:
-g=
Chorus.
^ — *~ »— * v %~» — \& — * — ^ •
-- N-* — m y
beauti - ful
evergreen shore; Yes. sing of that beauti - ful
V U
land, Where the weary shall sigh no more.
/T\
3§£
\
?
a=*.-ji:
- r -S-5— »-
5=P"
2rU
5
I- I
-^— ?-y-
(5?-
K±fe
F=&=0
ss
,_^_
*
3 The joys of that land never fade,
The flowers are e'er in bloom ;
No sorrow that land can invade,
For it lies just beyond the tomb.
4 O, when will our spirits ascend
To dwell in that, heav'nly clime,
Where pleasures ne'er have an end,
In the regions of bliss sublime.
r
:1
16a
Words by Rev. A. M. Evers.
j Lively.
WE'RE SAILING FOR HOME,
EH
0 — a — 0
■fi
-4r
-0-
s
4-
*
*
£
Music by Rev. I. "Saltzell.
^-t
±r
*
-+■
=t
~N
1. We're on the o
2. We're on the o
cean sailing, Our home's beyond the tide; King Jesus is our Captain, In him we will con
cean sailing, We know the sea is wide, But then our blessed Captain Stands with us side by
I I
-fide.
side.
1
We're sail
j Chorus
ing, we're sail - -
ing, we're sail -
ing for home, We're sail
ing, we're
0-F-i
We're sailing, we're sailing, we're sailing, we're sailing,we're sailing, we're sailing for home, We're sailing, we're sailing, we're
~v v If L> v t>
sail
I
t
1
ing, we're sail
frfrf:
v.. u u u...i^ ]/
-±
ing for home.
-4-2 1 —
*
0—0—0—0-
te*
I
1 I
sailing, we're sailing, we're sailing, we're sailing for home.
yrTf H-re
^
fr u; u— i^— y
V-b-L^
^
-0-
-0-
E
5 We're drifting into harbor,
Our loved ones wait us there ;
We soon shall join their number,
And dwell among the fair.
We're sailing, <fcc.
3 "We're sailing t'ward the harbor,
The happy sailors cry,
" Behold the far-off haven,
We'll anchor by and by.
We're sailing, &c.
4 Though sailing in the distance,
Our loved ones on the land ;
Are waving us a welcome,
To join their happy band.
We're sailing, «tc.
Drop down the anchor quickly,
And land upon the shore ;
Now safe at home with Jesus,
We'll shout for evermore.
We're safely at home.
GATHER THE HARVEST IN.
163
Duet.
Quartet
Words and Music by Rev. S. J. Graham.
Duet.
1. The harvest field's al - rea - dy white; Gather
2. There's work for ev' - ry one to do ; Gather
3. Young toil -ers in your Mas- ter's cause ; Gather
the harvest
the harvest
the harvest
m -&- m
in; A - mid the blaze of gos - pel light;
in; There's work for me, and work for you;
in ; Mind not to shun the world's applause ;
§L
Poor sinners arc dying all a - round, Gather the harvest
S—W-
r
&.
£
«
P$
in.
/g« g
TSTi^Sr
r^e-
i
Let every servant of the Lord
Gather the harvest in,
And have their sheaves securely stored;
(lather the harvest in,
Cho.— Gather the harvest in, etc.
5 Then when our work on eart h i done
We'll sh<mt the harvest home,
And then with God's heloved Son,
We'll shout the harvest home.
Clio— Shout the harvest home, etc.
164
Words bv Fanny Ctttrch,
*4
BEAUTIFUL HOME BEYQW.
ls=ts=$=5==$
?m
Arranged from A. S. Sikffkr.
i=*=i
t
I
3*
5=JT
S— *"
-0-
IB
J^SHeS
1 /Our home beyond, for-e-ver fair, Beauti - ful world of peace; \
\ No sin or death can en - ter there, Beauti - ful world of peace, j
§i£g
*—*-
?—fi-
£
* — # — # — i*-
-*-#
The tears of grief, the pangs of woe, Our
■#— *.
E
3
rf
z
f
-b^ — 1^ — ^t
i£
f
^ i 'J
v-r-v
\
V I
i
k
i
terh
«
Chorus.
^5
-N-ft
*
-3=3=1
1 S d
3t=JS
t±^
*
=2
35
£1
3
hearts no more shall ev-er know ; Our home beyond, our home beyond ; Beautiful world of peace.
■0- -+ - IS
Z_? »
f ^-
T~7
$t
?—0
'0P
*■ *— *
-0-
-0-
vTv
f
.0*
£
0'
0-±
-b>—v—v-
j£
t^f
^=i:
g-*-*
Beauti - ful
A
fc
B ^i» m-
JE
3?
5
«-i— «-
home beyond, Beauti - ful home beyond, Beauti - ful home beyond for you and me.
Beautiful home Beautiful home Beautiful home.
pg-r-f-f
S
*^«=t
pw-
±£
s
-0^0^0-0 L
.j^q/
F
L
# v r*-f-f-* — F-r* 1-^ tr^^r-
f
fV orsfc %■ tc6T J. IJ.VLl ZKtA.
I
i:
smg
£=£
NEARER LET ME BE.
h — ^ 1 — k
i
Music by Dr. Trios. Hastings.
165
5
-i^»
z
-*zz*
~*—r
^&E
4—0
22t
my God, to thee, Thou who hast died for me, E - ven for me. Near-er, my God and guide, Nearer the
oh, Son of God, Thy yoke will bear the load Which burdens me. Near-er, oh, Son of God, Near-er this
my God, to thee, Aly soul would ev-er be, For - ev - er be, Near - er to God, the Son, Near- er the
1. Near - er,
2. Near - er,
3. Near - er,
p3
t=t
u
i
A
5=?
*
i
Cru - d - fied, Near-er thy bleeding side, O let me be.
fee - ble clad, Come, oh, my Guide and God, Near-er to me.
Ho - ly One, Near - er the Three in One, O let me be.
»
■ 7t\T Ttt&r^f ff
mzm
■\
f
G-
V V
v — y-^&
4.
Nearer my hea verily home,
Where I shall never roam,
No, never roam.
O, hew my soul doth long
To join the holy throng;
Come, Holy Spirit, come
And bear me home.
Conducted from
Our home beyond, the land of rest;
Beautiful world of peace,
In thee our souls are ever blest;
Beautiful world of peace.
Dear Lord of love, we are in thee
From sin forevermore set free ;
Our home beyond, our home beyond,
Beautiful world of peace. — Chorus.
opposite page.
3 Our home beyond thy gates of light;
Beautiful world of peace,
Soon, soon will greet our yearning sight;
Beautiful world of peace.
And soon our feet shall touch the shore,
To tread the wavs of earth no more :
Our home beyond, our home beyond,
Beautiful world of peace. — Chorus.
166
EVERGREEN VALLEY OF PEACE.
Music by Rev. J. Bai/tzell.
A-h:
4z*^Z
uu
SEES
£
0—, ft"
i
V
-fr-
-ftr
-0-
H S — K »r — k
ft — Wi-j—ji — %^~*~
=£
-N-
~3»-
-ft
1. There's a land far a -way 'mid the stars, we are told, Where they know not the sor - rows of time, Where the
2. Tho' our grace can -not soar to that beau - ti - ful land, Yet our vi - sions have-told of its bliss: And our
fe
**-$■
ft*-£
4-V-*
£F=g
Hf>-
W-
•fr — P
£
-1*".'!*" "f" — "f* "f" ■ "P-*-
-ft- *--» — ft <x-r*
-L^— g-
£
#T
:=2z:
y
£
1 IS ^
Chorus.
1— ft— ft
K
Trf-ftW-
H JS-
1 h
"p~3£#t
-ftVA
r4-#— «- -ft ft* ft— 0-
'-■--ft'-ft-Lft
-fr— N
-ft--ft
^*i
*ft
pure waters wander thro' valleys of gold, And its life is a pleasure sublime. 'Tis the land of delight,'tis the honiecf the souh'Tis the
souls by the gales from its gardens are fanned,When we faint in the desert of this. 'Tis the land, etc.
t-
ft-A
£
+±*r
*=£
\t
■&Z2.
^-*
tr^
#.ft-
u-
v-v-
ft— ft* ft--
;^
p
fs— N-
-0-
-0-
-0-
-0-
f
Szift^:
£dy
**
m
ev-er-green val-ley of peace; There the way-weary traveller reaches his goal, In the ev-er-green valley of peace
*■ *■ *- •*- *■ h- -*-. - - - ^ - ■#• ^:glg g:H!-^-g| - ^
'— ftH- ft — ft-' -ft — ft — ft*;
-ft-
-0-
tt
=1
1
ft
-F-
L^-
:y— &
£=£
-»-
-y-
ft
rzzfczg
•ft-
:y— fer
T
m
3. Oh, the stars never tread the blie heaven of night,
But we think where the ransomed have gone;
And the day never smiles from his palace of light,
But we wish we were there by the throne. — L'ho.
We are travelling homeward thro' changes and gloom,
To a land of unchangeable bliss,
And our guide is the glory that shines thro' the tomb
From the evergreen valley of peace. — Cho.
j Promptly.
-J2~^ l-r-N-
B|T£*Ef=s
MY FATHER'S HOUSE.
i
167
Arr. Rink.
1. There is a place of wave - less rest, Far, far beyond, the skies, Where beauty smiles e - tor- nal-ly, And
2. When tossed up-on the waves of life, With fear on ev' - ry side; When fiercely howls the gath'ring storm, An
a place of wave - less rest, Far, far
up-on
tf'tf
And
^m
A
r
*— ^
££
H 1 — I T-r F " -f-* «-t
plea - sure nev -
foams the an - gry
dies,
tide.
My Fa-ther's house! my heav'nly home! Where man v man -sions
Be-yond the storm, be- yond the gloom, Breaks forth the light of
stand;
morn
Pre-
Bright
fe
:3:
/TS
-=»-
-#-
— I-
2
Eared by hands di-vine, for all Who seek the bet ■
earn - in<,r from my Fa- ther's house, To cheer the soul
I
ter
for -
land,
lorn.
3.
In that pure home of endless joy,
Earth's parted friends shall meet,
With smiles of love that never fade,
And blessedness complete ;
There, there, adieus are uever known,
Death frowns not <>n the scene, —
But light and glorious beauty shine,
Untroubled and serene.
ME HUNDRED YEARS AGO.
Dedicated to Centennial of the United Brethren Church
By Rev. I. Baltzell.
-K—
\ — #-
h — m-
■rN
0 0-
f
±-"tr-*-*i
f
JB
1. One hundred years, one hundred years, Our bark o'er billowy seas, Has onward swept her steady .courseThro,
2. When first our gallant ship was launched, The mariners were few; Yet dauntless was each bosomtfbund, And
rM
^M
&-r
2E£
%
V-+
-I — v— j-
J^
fafazAzzl-
-# — &-
-I F-
^F
■(4
-a— »-*—*
3f
£a
-N— IT
*
=t
-M-
*
i
=t
— i-
-#-
hur - ri - cane and breeze. Her Captain is the His - en One; She braved the stormy foe; And
ev' - ry heart was true. And still, though in her mighty hull, Un-num-bered bosoms glow, Her
-*• #- ■#-
#• A-
#--— *■
5
£
1
^-1
still he guides, who guided her, One hundred years a
crew is faith - ful as it was One hundred years a
^
/TN
£
:pcji:
1 trl"
£
v—v-
f
go. Speed on, speed on, Thou
go. speed on, speed on,
%
£e£
sv
r^r
4z
-V — -i 1^-
-l^-'-l — V---
fe
OTf HUNDRED YEARS AGO. Concluded
169
* IN
=■&=£=£
£=+=F%
TS N -A-
* ~ 1 1 1 ! ! -m m *r-0
-4— *
w=zt=jt
m
w
\^
*
m
gallant old bark, speed od, Till thousands shall bless the bark that sailed One hundred years a - go.
J.
S=£
t^F
§
-y — p— b
True to that guiding star which led
To Israel's cradled hope ;
Her steady needle pointeth yet
To Calvary's bloody top.
Yes, there she floats, that good old ship 1
From mast to keel below,
Seaworthy still as she was found"
One hundred years ago. — Chorus.
b^
I
/7\
T
4-
Fr^F*
f=£^
v v I
#— - — e — L
W
■^r
Then, onward speed, thou brave old bark,
Yes, onward in thy pride,
O'er sunny seas and billows dark
With Jesus as thy guide.
Still sacred is each plank and spar,
Unchanged by friend or foe,
Just as she left the port of hope
One hundred years ago. — Chorus.
Words by E. R. Latta.
ON THY TRUTH AND GRACE REL YING.
* N N )
£e3eM
Music by T. C. O'kane.
_dr
&-
s
-4r
5=^*^=^
*--&-
+ It
__ — #.
i-'.On thy truth and grace re - ly - ing, We have gath - ered in thy name ; Clinging to the cross of
2. Un - to right - eous - ness a - wak - ing, Put -ting all the ar - mor on; Trusting to thy hand to
9^
\
5=^
E
■tr-Vt-
m
i
&
^^R^F^S
h
170
§n
h
ON THY TRUTH AND GRACE RELYING. Concluded.
:^=q:
?=*¥
-*r-h-H
i-ji
0
■£■
■&
N_t *.
r* *
— i-
:*=3
a|=a:
-#-
— I-
4-
:*C
-*— *-
^
r^
2
-d?1 — #— ^t :
-j # — S_L
mer - cy, We would now thy blessing claim. We are weak, and we are helpless, Of ourselves no good can do ;
guide us, Till the shadows are withdrawn. Thus adorned with heav'nly graces, Others shall our light behold,
m
■<*- ■*-
Thou hast
And the
V 9
-»-
-i 1 — i — i —
f — y— v— y-
■&-
I
rf-#a
F-V-
I
I
^_£.
t
-I/— ^— i/
:«e
^
1 — r
v^-
S
-y— y-
p^
~F~17
-N-
-#-
promised,
ways of
-i-1--*-
*
fe^
f i
0-
=5
s
£_N
Chorus.
«-
3
^
-■it
-i —
— i-
V
£
^-+;
"k— N
Lord, to aid us,
sin for-sak - ing,
^
H*=p:
And thy prom - i - ses are true.
Seek the dear Ile-deemer's fold.
-#-f — # d
-»--• — » F 1
In the name
of Christ
u - nit
i — r
ed,
For
V
-f=£
£e£
V V V
r
r — tr-fcr
It
-^ — V-—
$
W-
ES*
p
V-
eIS
t
§9=
3
-£»-
5
^
0_ [-#-*■ — #
Si
v
hun
A
5
:^3
— L^3
£?-
dred years
F
- gone;
V-
In the name
%
v-
of Christ u
nit - ed,
Till the heavenly morn
shall dawn.
-#
i r-
s
-y-
v-
3 Truly thou to us hast given
Of the riches of thy grace;
Move our hearts to send thy gospel
To tho'earth's remotest place.
r~:
On thy truth and grace relying,
We have gathered in thy name;
Clinging to the cross of mercy,
We would now thy blessing claim. — Chorus*
Words by Ltly W. Grafton. CENTENNIAL HYMN. Music by W. A. Ogden.
Dedicated to the "United Brethren in Christ," in Christian Love.
J \ \
171
thou art near, And just and
•wakened soul, We bless, O
N
true
Lord
in all
thy ho
thy ways.
- ly inune.
Fr mi seed that once was sown in tears. With grateful hearts to
For all thvteu-der, fost'ring care, Thy watchful love and
3 Nearer to thee, hy sorrows bound,
Close to thy riven side we cling;
A refuge sure and safe is found
Beneath the shadow of thy wing.
And when from every land and clime,
Thy children come, from earth set free,
High we shall raise the Bong sublime,
All honor, glory, praise to thee.
Help us by faith our works to show,
To tell the story of thy love,
And while we dwell in tents below,
Point sinners to a home above.
Oh, write upon our hearts thy word
Of cheering hope, and love divine,
"They that turn many to the Lord,
Bright as the morning stars shall shine."
Hasten the day, when distant lands,
And tribes beyond the rolling sea,
Unnumbered as the ocean sands.
Shall join in giving praise to thee.
Winn all shall choose the better part,
In answer to the Master's call,
And peace divine rest on each heart,
As dews on Sion's lilies fall.
172
I
W=t=
I CHORUS. Fast, earnest, joyous.
CENTENARY. Responsive Song and Chorus.
By per. W. H. LAxthusjJ.
^*
■+
+
*t«
f
— »-
-#-
-#-
=^
--*-
"0'
— i-
. — i-
*zzz# — £
A huudred thousand voic-es raise Their loudest notes of grateful praise; Re-joieing far, re-joicing near, On
Chorus/or last stanza.
A hundred thousand voic-es pray. O Lord ! throughout our land to-day ; Be pleased, most gracious God. to hQar Our
f-if
i i 1 c— r- F 0 — r
-I-
-\
k
i^nOE
i
N
— i-
ifzr
£=F
^
Stovlxj, reverently.
1
1*=^
^—
^
^ -T- 4r*~
tS d —
-5>-
■Z5<-
«5*-
this our first Cen
pray'r in this Cen
9:£>— g
??S
-Ha &
n:
r
/en
ten
-a-
nial
nial
Ch
Year.
Year.
<2-i_
^_.
-*>-=-
1. That thou, O
2. For such he
O-
-***
&-
(Jod, didst first in - spire Our fa
ro - ic faith and hope; The will
jGL
thers with
With gi -
su-
ant
-±-
._L
<s
-&-
I t I
f
-(2-
7SL
& f— \-*~
E=-t
r— I-
s
I — 1~
-«>-
-^-
q=t
f I
~J —
F£
^=
u^-
9-
preme de - sire, To found a church whose creed should he The
ills to cope; "For true pro- phet - ic sight to see Sue
-! T »g — tar
Rood
CPS8
of
in
man,
what
3*=
the
is
-4-
love
one
-h
L
:t:
( —
-i —
^2-
1
(2-
^
±=:
k
t
-t^f
£
f
of thee—
with thee—
a-
*=£
t-=*-
£
^-
i
* Commence with the Chorus, and repeat it as a response after each stanza; except the last, to which sin? the " Chorus for last
stanza." The hest effect will be secured by singing the Hymn as a Solo, or Duet, (Soprano and Alto,) the Chorus commencing very
promptly at the conclusion of each stanza of the Hymn.
Mod
pi
oderato.
Duett.
OUR YEAR OF JUBILEE.
Arranged by Rev. T. Baltzeix.
173
#=#
S
-V
>v
±
r^— g v-t— i — ^
d 4
IT*
El
2
1. Bless -ed Christ, thou ris - en Sa - viour,
2. Lord, within thy sa - cred tern - pie,
3. Forms that long have borne life's bur -den,
4. Then, when all the gold - en a - ges
t§
=fc
-9-
-9-
i=a
303
J-
Grate- ful praise to thee we bring, While with thankful hearts and
We thy peo - pie love to be, Cel - e - brat - ing here to-
Now are Dending t'ward the grave, Lips that oft have told th*.
Have fulfilled their song of praise, All the earth - ly choirs ot
* S
zXzz2zz~&
w—t^-w\
*-*\g
A— ^
-9Y~r9
V
9'¥
4
^=ts
±tzJt±±
:i
-fs—5
-#-
*
»3=«
pH
voic-es, Glad ho-san - nas sweetly sing; Through long years of wondrous blessing, Thy dear guiding hand I see.
gether, This our year of Ju - hi - lee ; Here with reverend head and hoa - ry, Now in wor - ship bow - ing down,
sto - ry Of the Saviour's power to save, They will soon be hushed for- ev - er, Happy voic-es, that we love,
voic - es Blend with heaven's seraphic lays, With the glorious Church triumphant Saved thro' Christ's redeeming love,
Chorus.
±
X
jtnz§
m
Bit.
1
-9-
-9-
£
S
r-
-N-
3
I
IS
All the joy which crowns this hour, Gracious Lord, is due to thee,
May the young and brave dis-ci - pie Add new lus - tre to thy crown,
Lost a- mid the heaven - ly ran - sic, Swelling with the song a- bove,
We will join in eel - e-brat - ing One long Ju - bi - lee a - bove,
-&-
E
1 m * 0 ' iTp
Lord, is due to thee.
lus - tre to thy crown,
with the song a - bove.
Ju - bi - lee a - bove.
V-
1ZL
&
tr-fr
22L
-t-
X
y u
For all their hard and patient toil —
Their preparation of the soil;
The sowing of the seed in tears,
Through many long and weary years.
Cho.
For God-like power to work and wait,
Yet not a jot of zeal abate,
And in the darkest hour repeat,
"With God there can be no defeat."- Cho.
Concluded from opposite page.
5 For precious fruit already grown
From seed, in tears and faith, long sown,
For thousands in that blest abode,
A hundred thousand on the road.-Cfo.
6 For what of good already done ;
For much accomplished, more begun ;
For battles fought, and victories won,
All in the name of thy dear Son \-Ow.
7 For humble record of the past.
For progress sure, if never Cut ;
For brighter hopes, for future years,
And glory that e-'en now appears ;-Cho.
8 That all our future power may be
Full consecrate, 0 Lord, to Thee,
And that thy blessing may attend
Thy people ahvay to the encL-Cfco.
174
With expression.
WE'LL MEET AGAIN.
-0^0—0—0- -0—0-
! — II
1. When shall we meet again ? Meet ne'er to sever? When will peace wreathe her chain Round us forever? Our hearts will ne'er re-
2. When shall love freely flow, Pure as life's river? Whenshall sweet friendship glow, Changeless forever? Where joys celestial
3. Up to that world oi light, Take us, dear Saviour ; May we all there u-nite, Hap - py forever ; Where kindred spirits
•0- -&- •#- •#• -^- -^-
-0-
-0-
-&-
- i I ■
4-
+—
:P=^
^
-/
-F-
-7^-
-0—&-
■gr-
0—0—&-
P
z3s:
# I
3^
§
t
pose, Safe from each hlast that hlows, In this dark vale of woes. Never, no, never !
thrill, Where bliss each heart shall fill, And fears of parting chill Never, no, never !
dwell, There may our music swell, And time our joys dispel Never, no, never I
*
fe:
-15?.
# »-» ■ #
-.«>-
-t^-
t
c
-0-
-\—
~&L
'Ft'
»-»vb5T--
-I 1-
A
yt-t
-#-»-
:£
£fi
«" H-#— 0— 0— 0—-
-\— +
-P-P-
-F
i
i— !-
Soon shall we meet again,
Meet ne'er to sever ;
Soon will peace wreath her chain,
Round us forever ;
Our hearts will then repose —
Secure from worldly woes ;
Our songs of praise shall close
Never, no, never!
sn a Slow. /bn | - .
DOXOLOGY.
4- "»
iisi^gS^i^i
4-
Praise God, from whom all blessings flow, Praise him above, ye heavenly host,
Praise him, all creatureshere below; Praise Father, Sun, and Holy Ghost.
J /P\ j -0 f- -0- m ^ -ft -ft- m #.#.#.#. *. _ T m m JLtl JL .0.,?
wm
T-=t=t
J. H. ABMSTOOtta, Uaala Tjpographor, 133 So. Eighth St., PhiUdolphlo,
IN,
All Together
-: There
. . ...
. away
•r the
Horr.
nd on Hie:!
Thee, i - .tLot
_:n to Pra
I H •
hildren I
Children of : |
Children of Z
Child: nna^.
Children's Kingdom
Cling to the Rock
Cling to the Saviour-
Come A sain
Come Little Sol
lie to
ie to Je>
Come to the Saviour to-day
:e unto me
vn him I
Dead and Gone
Don't you hear them'
Doxcl g
Eeh -
Evergreen Plain
of I
— ..,,
k^i not the Diss V'ave.
60
133
m
57
: :.:
63
114
127
111
"
134
105
3
-.
■
est in _ .
me
Gai: 2.e» in
Going Hon:.
Go: > , ,
: ' rd
pe on,
thinking of Home
_.. . — T '___?■*.•.•••••••«•.,
" -v? .....
,2 in gkrr
:
: as I torn
Land Ahead.
Lead then me,.~— ~
r~
Lord abide «•;
stmmu.
I
Mv Cla^.
Fa:her'> Home— ,
\rer let me be
irer mv God . ee.
Kow is Lb£
si
:-
157
: -
::
3
152
: l
;
4
s
113
129
H
:*
146
45
tWDEX
O all ye people 110
O come to me 93
The Joyous Morning 4*
The Little Wanderer 87
O Home, Sweet Home 159 The Living Jesus 53
One Hundred Years aero , 108 The Lord hath need of me 69
Only across the Dark River. i24
On thv truth and grace relying 169
On to Victory .*. 112
Open wide the Golden Gate 132
O see them now marching 128
O steer my bark 100
O the Rest 67
Our year of Jubilee 173
Over There 58
Over the River 66
Owe love to come 37
Come to.the Savior 105
Pilgrims of the Night 82
Precious Jesus 46
Precious Name 94
Remember thy Creator 146
Rest at Home 56
Sailing o'er the Sea 52
Seal me ever Thine 137
Shall we meet 59
Sing of a Saviour's love 141
Sing of that Beautiful Land 161
TheClindBoy 121
Stand the Storm 70
Still press on 158
Sweeping through the Gate 84
Children, Come Home. 54
Take my hand Dear Jesus 149
The Cleansing Fountain 104
The Cross, the Cross 96
The Golden Plain 47
The Precious Blood of Jesus 99
There She's Resting 85
There's work for all 126
The Rock that is higher 55
The Saviour Calls 107
The Sunday-school Army , 122
The Sunday-school Ship 118
The Sure Foundation » 50
The Sweetest Name 64
The way to be happy 108
They are Waiting 65
Throw open the Gates afar 116
Thy Father calls, "Come Home." 150
'Tis but little we can do 148
To be there 72
Toiling up the way 88
'Twill be sweet when we meet 41
Up and Doing 145
Waiting for me 125
Watching and Waiting 144
We are Homeward Bound 140
We are Sailing for Home 162
Weary of earth 154
We come, we come.., 92
Welcome Home 102
We'll meet again 174
We'll meet them again 51
We're coming Dear Saviour 79
What shall the harvest be? 138
When the Tempest passes over 68
White as snow 76
To Jesus then go 78 [ White Robes , 89
J. M. Armstrong. Music Typographer, 138 S. Eighth St, Philada.
OUR POPULAR BOOKS.
SUNDAY-SCHOOL BOOKS.
By Itn. E. 8. LORENZ aid Bev. 1. BALTZEU.
Over Half a Million Books by these au-
thors huvebeen sold.
Prices uniform : Single copy, 35 cents ;
per dozen, by express, $3.60; by mail,
$4.00; per hundred, by express, $30.00.
All are well bound, well printed, and
complete in every way, with the usual
number of pages.
THE LATEST— NOTES OF TRIUMPH.
— Two edition* -- Round and Character
Notes. — The music is bright, easy, and
of high character. The words are ap-
propriate, thoroughly devotional, and
full of the gospel. A large number of
authors, nortbern and southern, have
contributed, insuring variety. Con-
tains many of the best hymns of the
church. A very popular book in every
way. Sample copy to Superintendents
for 25 cents.
GOLDEN SONGS.-By Rev. I. Baltzell.
One of the most popular music books
ever issued. Easy, cheerful, and help-
ful. Contains an elementary depart-
ment for instruction in music.
HEAVENLY CAROLS.-The best hym-
nal and musical talent in the land was
drawn upon to furnish material for
this book. Prof. J. II. Kurzenknabe
furnished a new and improved elemen-
tary department.
SONGS OP THE CROSS. -By Rev. E. S.
Lorenz. Words and music of very high
order, and adapted to every occasion of
interest. Contains an elementary de-
partment, concisely and clearly stated.
GATES OF PRAISE.— One of the best
Sunday-school books we have issued.
Full of life and suggestion.
" The lone of trie hymns is healthful, and of
a stimulating character, suitable lor praise-
meeting use. The music is of a good degree of
merit, intelligently written and attractively pre-
sented."— Sunday-school Times.
SONGS OF THE KINGDOM. -A selec-
tion of the best hymns of our other
books. Includes many standard church
hymns. With elementary department.
208 pages.
" This is a choice collection of songs and
hymns for the Sunday-school and other social
services, and is a practical working song book,
carefully prepared lor Sunday-schools as they
are." — Philadelphia Methodist.
HOLT VOICES.-Fresh, spirited, full of
the Gospel. Very popular. Carefully
prepared to meet the best wants of the
school.
" The contents of this book are of a superior
order. There is nothing trashy about it." — Chris-
tian World.
"An admirable collection." — Christian Index.
PILGER LIEDER.— A German hymn-
book for the Sunday-school. Carefully
prepared, and hymns wisely selected.
With 238 hymns, 180 being set to music.
Per dozen, by express, $3.00; by mail,
$3.60.
For Fravjer, Y raise, aipo 5\eViVal
Meetings.
SONGS FOR TIMES OF REFRESHING.
—By Rev. E. S. Lorenz and Rev. I.
Baltzell. A well arranged, carefully
prepared book of 64 large pages, with
popular hymns and tunes, many of
them the familiar songs of the church.
Bound in manilla. Single copy, 15
cents; per dozen, $1.50; per hundred,
by express, $12.00.
PRAISE OFFERING. — Designed ex-
pressly for prayer-meetings, and cam p-
meetings. Hymns well chosen. Price,
20 cents.
SONGS OF CHEER FOR THE Mas-
ter's Workers.— By Rev. E. S. Lorenz
and Rev. I. Baltzell. Especially for
camp-meeting services. A popular
book. Thirty-two pages, manilla cov-
ers. Single copy, 10 cents ; per dozen,
by mail, $1.00; fifty or more at the
rate of $6.00 per hundred, express
charges unpaid.
SONGS OF GRACE.-By Rev. E. S.
Lorenz and Rev. I. Baltzell. Large
size, excellent selections, devotional
hymns. Single copy, 25 cents ; per
dozen, by express, $2.50; by mail, $3.00.
FOR CHURCHES.
HYMNS FOR THE SANCTUARY.
The Hymnal of the United Brethren in
Christ.
WITH TUNES. SQ. 12jIO
No. 1. Cloth sides $1 35
No. 2. Colored leather 1 75
No. 3. Morocco 2 50
No. 4. Levant mor., cushion bevel 4 00
No. 5. Levant mor., divinity circuit 4 50
WOBDS ONLY. 18MO.
-
No. 1. Roan embossed...' 75
No. 2. Roan embossed, gilt edges.. 1 00
No. 3. Imitation mor., extra gilt... 1 25
No. 4. Same as No. 3, with clasp... 1 50
No. 5. Turkey morocco, extra gilt 1 75
GERMAN HYMNS.
( Without Music.)
No. 1. Leather i 00
No. 2. Morocco 1 35
Harl'entone :'-<»
M
Address all Orders to REV. W. J. SHUEY, Dayton, Ohio.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11